2017 BMW I3 30

Contents BMW i
A-Z The Ultimate

Driving Machine®
THE BMW i3.

OWNER'S MANUAL.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402978839 - II/17

i3 Owner's Manual for the vehicle
Thank you for choosing a BMW i.
The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control
you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:
Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW
i. Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It
contains important information on vehicle operation that will
help you make full use of the technical features available in your
BMW i. The manual also contains information designed to en‐
hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to
maintaining the value of your BMW i.
Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found in
the appendix of the Owner's Manual for the vehicle.
We wish you a safe and enjoyable ride.
The Owner's Manual is available in many countries as an app.

Additional information on the Internet:
www.bmw.com/bmw_i_drivers_guide

© 2017 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written
consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English II/17, 03 17 490
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached
without chlorine, suitable for recycling.

Contents
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐ Mobility
ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to 174 Charging the vehicle
page 232. 184 Refueling
186 Fuel
187 Wheels and tires
6 Information
201 Under the hood
At a glance 203 Engine oil
14 Cockpit 205 Coolant
18 iDrive 207 Maintenance
26 Voice activation system 209 Replacing components
29 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle 215 Breakdown assistance
31 BMW eDRIVE 220 Care
34 Safety of the high-voltage system
Reference
Controls 228 Technical data
38 Opening and closing 230 Appendix
55 Settings 232 Everything from A to Z
63 Transporting children safely
67 Driving
81 Displays
97 Lights
101 Safety
116 Driving stability control systems
119 Driving comfort
137 Climate control
146 Interior equipment
156 Storage compartments
Driving tips
162 Things to remember when driving
166 Loading
168 Increasing the range

Information
Information
Using this Owner's Manual Additional sources of
information
Orientation
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐ Dealer’s service center
ular topic is by using the index. A dealer’s service center will be glad to answer
An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in questions at any time.
the first chapter.
Internet
Updates made after the editorial The Owner's Manual and general information
deadline on BMW, for example on technology, are avail‐
Due to updates after the editorial deadline, dif‐ able on the Internet: www.bmwusa.com.
ferences may exist between the printed Own‐
er's Manual and the following Owner's Man‐ BMW iDriver’s Guide App
uals:
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
▷ Online Owner's Manual.
▷ BMW Driver’s Guide app.
Notes on updates can be found in the appen‐
The Owner's Manual is available in many coun‐
dix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehi‐
tries as an app. Additional information on the
cle.
Internet:
Owner's Manual for Navigation, www.bmw.com/bmw_i_drivers_guide
Entertainment, Communication
The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment, and Communication can be obtained as Symbols and displays
printed book from the service center.
Symbols in the Owner's Manual
The topics of Navigation, Entertainment, and
Communication can be called up via the fol‐ Indicates precautions that must be followed
lowing Owner's Manuals: precisely in order to avoid the possibility of
personal injury and serious damage to the
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual on the Control
vehicle.
Display in the vehicle.
◄ Marks the end of a specific item of
▷ Online Owner's Manual.
information.
▷ BMW iDriver’s Guide app.
Refers to measures that can be taken to
help protect the environment.
"..." Identifies display texts in vehicle used to
select individual functions.
›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voice
activation system.
6
Information
››...‹‹ Identifies the answers generated by the and illustrates features and functions that are
voice activation system. not available in your vehicle, for example be‐
cause of the selected optional features or the
Action steps country-specific version.
Action steps to be carried out are presented as This also applies to safety-related functions
numbered list. The steps must be carried out and systems.
in the defined order. When using these functions and systems, the
1. First action step. applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
served.
2. Second action step.
Your BMW dealer’s service center is happy to
Enumerations answer any questions that you may have about
the features and options applicable to your ve‐
Enumerations without mandatory order or al‐
hicle.
ternative possibilities are presented as list with
bullet points.
▷ First possibility. Status of the Owner's
▷ Second possibility. Manual
Symbols on vehicle components Basic information
Indicates that you should consult the The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a
relevant section of this Owner's Manual for policy of constant development that is con‐
information on a particular part or assembly. ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to
embody the highest quality and safety stan‐
dards. In rare cases, therefore, the features de‐
scribed in this Owner's Manual may differ from
those in your vehicle.
Updates made after the editorial

deadline
Due to updates after the editorial deadline, dif‐
ferences may exist between the printed Own‐
Indicates, on certain parts or assemblies, that er's Manual and the following Owner's Man‐
incorrect use of high-voltage equipment or of uals:
orange-colored high-voltage components re‐ ▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
sults in the risk of life-threatening injury from ▷ Online Owner's Manual.
electric shock.
▷ BMW Driver’s Guide app.
Notes on updates can be found in the appen‐
dix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehi‐
Vehicle features and options cle.
This Owner's Manual describes all models and
all standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series.
Therefore, this Owner's Manual also describes
7
Information
For Your Own Safety work, e.g., maintenance and repair, according
to BMW i specifications with properly trained
Intended use personnel, referred to in this Owner's Manual
as "another qualified service center or repair
Observe the following when using the vehicle:
shop".
▷ Owner's Manual.
DANGER
▷ Information on the vehicle. Do not remove
stickers. Improperly executed work, in particular
maintenance and repair on the high-voltage
▷ Technical vehicle data.
system and the carbon body as well as acces‐
▷ The traffic, speed, and safety laws where sories retrofits, can lead to electric shock.
the vehicle is driven. There is a risk of injury, fire and danger to life.
▷ Vehicle documents and statutory docu‐ The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
ments. that the work on the vehicle, in particular main‐
tenance and repair, be performed only by an
Warranty authorized BMW i dealer’s service center or
another qualified service center or repair
Your vehicle is technically configured for the
shop.◀
operating conditions and registration require‐
ments applying in the country of first delivery,
also known as homologation. If your vehicle is Parts and accessories
to be operated in a different country it might be BMW recommends the use of parts and ac‐
necessary to adapt your vehicle to potentially cessory products approved by BMW.
differing operating conditions and permit re‐
Approved parts and accessories, and advice
quirements. If your vehicle does not comply
on their use and installation are available from
with the homologation requirements in a cer‐
a BMW dealer's service center.
tain country you may not be able to lodge war‐
ranty claims for your vehicle there. Further in‐ BMW parts and accessories have been tested
formation on warranty is available from a by BMW for their safety and suitability in BMW
dealer’s service center. vehicles.
BMW warrants genuine BMW parts and acces‐
Working on the vehicle, maintenance sories.
and repairs BMW does not evaluate whether each individ‐
Advanced technology, especially the use of ual product from another manufacturer can be
high-performance high-voltage electronics used with BMW vehicles without presenting a
and modern materials such as carbon, requires safety hazard, even if a country-specific official
special knowledge when making modifications approval was issued. BMW does not evaluate
to and working on the vehicle, as well as cus‐ whether these products are suitable for BMW
tomized maintenance and repair work. vehicles under all usage conditions.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
having changes to and work on the vehicle, es‐ California Proposition 65 Warning
pecially maintenance and repair of the high- California laws require us to state the following
voltage system and the carbon body as well as warning:
retrofitting of accessories, done by an author‐ Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automo‐
ized BMW i dealer’s service center. If you bile components and parts, including compo‐
choose to use another service facility, BMW nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi‐
recommends use of a facility that performs
8
Information
cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the Maintenance

State of California to cause cancer and birth Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the
defects and reproductive harm. In addition, road safety, operational reliability and the New
certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain Vehicle Limited Warranty.
products of component wear contain or emit
Specifications for required maintenance meas‐
chemicals known to the State of California to
ures:
cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐
ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re‐ ▷ BMW Maintenance system
lated accessories contain lead and lead com‐ ▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet
pounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used for US models
engine oil contains chemicals that have caused ▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect Canadian models
your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and
water. If the vehicle is not maintained according to
these specifications, this could result in seri‐
ous damage to the vehicle. Such damage is
Service and warranty
not covered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited
We recommend that you read this publication Warranty.
thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol‐
lowing warranties:
▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Data memory
▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.
Many electronic components on your vehicle
▷ Federal Emissions System Defect War‐ are equipped with data memories that tempo‐
ranty. rarily or permanently store technical informa‐
▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty. tion about the condition of the vehicle, events
▷ California Emission Control System Lim‐ and faults. This technical information generally
ited Warranty. records the state of a component, a module, a
system or the environment:
Detailed information about these warranties is
listed in the Service and Warranty Information ▷ Operating states of system components,
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and e.g., fill levels.
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models. ▷ Status messages for the vehicle and from
Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and its individual components, e.g., wheel rota‐
designed to meet the particular operating con‐ tion speed, wheel speed, deceleration,
ditions and homologation requirements in your transverse acceleration.
country and continental region in order to de‐ ▷ Malfunctions and faults in important sys‐
liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle tem components, e.g., lights and brakes.
is operated under those conditions. If you wish ▷ Responses by the vehicle to special situa‐
to operate your vehicle in another country or tions such as airbag deployment or en‐
region, you may be required to adapt your ve‐ gagement of the stability control systems.
hicle to meet different prevailing operating
▷ Ambient conditions, such as temperature.
conditions and homologation requirements.
You should also be aware of any applicable This data is purely technical in nature and is
warranty limitations or exclusions for such used to detect and correct faults and to opti‐
country or region. In such case, please contact mize vehicle functions. Motion profiles over
Customer Relations for further information. routes traveled cannot be created from this
9
Information
data. When service offerings are used, e.g., re‐ This data can help provide a better under‐
pair services, service processes, warranty standing of the circumstances in which
claims, quality assurance, this technical infor‐ crashes and injuries occur.
mation can be read out from the event and EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a
fault memories by employees of a dealer’s nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data is re‐
service center or another qualified service cen‐ corded by the EDR under normal driving condi‐
ter or repair shop, including the manufacturer, tions and no personal data, e.g., name, gender,
using special diagnostic tools. You can obtain age, and crash location, are recorded.
further information there if you need it. After an
However, other parties, such as law enforce‐
error is corrected, the information in the fault
ment, could combine the EDR data with the
memory is deleted or overwritten on a continu‐
type of personally identifying data routinely ac‐
ous basis.
quired during a crash investigation.
With the vehicle in use there are situations
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
where you can associate this technical data
equipment is required, and access to the vehi‐
with individuals if combined with other infor‐
cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the ve‐
mation, e.g., an accident report, damage to the
hicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law
vehicle, eye witness accounts — possibly with
enforcement, that have the special equipment,
the assistance of an expert.
can read the information if they have access to
Additional functions that are contractually the vehicle or the EDR.
agreed with the customer — such as vehicle
emergency locating — allow certain vehicle
data to be transmitted from the vehicle.
Vehicle identification
number
Event Data Recorder EDR
This vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐
corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐
tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting
a road obstacle, data that will assist in under‐
standing how a vehicle’s systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a
short period of time, typically 30 seconds or The vehicle identification number can be found
less. under a cover under the front passenger seat.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record The vehicle identification number can also be
such data as: found behind the windshield.
▷ How various systems in your vehicle were
operating.
▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger Reporting safety defects
safety belts were fastened.
▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing
For US customers
the accelerator and/or brake pedal. The following only applies to vehicles owned
and operated in the US.
▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling.
10
Information
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect

which could cause a crash or could cause in‐
jury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis‐
tration NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of
North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, West‐
wood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone
1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer,
or BMW of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator,
NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washing‐
ton, DC 20590. You can also obtain other in‐
formation about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
For Canadian customers

Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada, De‐
fect Investigations and Recalls, may call the
toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.
11
At a glance
These overviews of buttons, switches and
displays are intended to familiarize you with your
vehicle. Moreover, you will become familiar with
the available control concepts and options
quickly.

At a glance Cockpit
Cockpit
Vehicle features and options to the selected options or country versions.
This also applies to safety-related functions
This chapter describes all standard, country- and systems. When using these functions and
specific and optional features offered with the systems, the applicable laws and regulations
series. It also describes features that are not must be observed.
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
In the vicinity of the steering wheel
1 Power windows 51 Low beams 97

2 Exterior mirror operation 60
3 Unlock hood 45 Automatic headlight con‐
Unlock tailgate 45 trol 98
With Range Extender: vent fuel tank 184 Daytime running lights 99
4 Lights Instrument lighting 99
Light switch 97
5 Left steering column stalk

Parking lights 97
14
Cockpit At a glance
Turn signal 75 Rear window wiper 78
High beams, head‐ Clean the rear window 78

light flasher 75
Roadside parking lights 97 10 Steering wheel buttons, right

Entertainment source
Onboard Computer 93
Volume
6 Instrument cluster 81
7 Switch drive-ready state on and Voice activation 26
off 67
8 Selector lever 69 Telephone

9 Right steering column stalk
Wiper 76 Thumbwheel for selection lists 92
11 Adjust steering wheel 62
Rain sensor 77 12 Steering wheel buttons, left
Cruise control on/off, inter‐
rupt 125
Clean the windshield and head‐
lights 77 Active Cruise Control on/off, in‐
terrupt 119
Rear window wiper in Canadian
models 78 Cruise control: store speed
Cruise control: resume speed
Active Cruise Control, adjust dis‐

tance
Cruise control rocker switch

13 Horn, entire surface
15
At a glance Cockpit
In the vicinity of the center console
1 Control Display 18 6 Controller with buttons 19

2 Radio/Multimedia, refer to Integrated Own‐ 7 Parking brake 73
er's Manual 8 PDC Park Distance Control 127
3 Glove compartment 156 Rearview camera 130
4 Climate control 137 Parking assistant 133
5 Hazard warning system 215
9 Driving Dynamics Control 117
Intelligent Safety 109
16
Cockpit At a glance
In the vicinity of the roofliner
1 Emergency Request, SOS 215 4 Reading lights 99
2 Glass sunroof, electric 52 5 Interior lights 99
3 Indicator light, front-seat passen‐

ger airbag 104
17
At a glance iDrive
iDrive
Vehicle features and options Overview of control elements
This chapter describes all standard, country-
Operation
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
to the selected options or country versions.
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Concept 1 Control Display

The iDrive combines the functions of many 2 Controller with buttons and, depending on
switches. Thus, these functions can be oper‐ the equipment version, with touchpad
ated from a central location.
Control Display
Safety information General information

WARNING To clean the Control Display, follow the care
Operating the integrated information instructions.
systems and communication devices while Do not place objects close to the Control Dis‐
driving can distract from traffic. It is possible to play; otherwise, the Control Display or other
lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an surfaces can be damaged.
accident. Only use the systems or devices In the case of very high temperatures on the
when the traffic situation allows. If necessary, Control Display, for instance due to intense so‐
stop and use the systems and devices while lar radiation, the brightness may be reduced
the vehicle is stationary.◀ down to complete deactivation. Once the tem‐
perature is reduced, for instance through
shade or air conditioning, the normal functions
are restored.
Switching on
1. Turn on standby state.
2. Press the controller.
Switching off
1. Press button.
18
iDrive At a glance
2. "Turn off control display" 3. Move in four directions.
Controller Buttons on the controller

The buttons can be used to open the menus
directly. The Controller can be used to select Button Function
menu items and enter the settings. MENU Opens the main menu.
Some iDrive functions can be operated using
the touchpad on the Controller. RADIO Opens the Radio menu.
1. Turn. MEDIA Opens the Multimedia menu.
NAV Opens the Navigation menu.
TEL Opens the Phone menu.
BACK Displays the previous panel.
OPTION Open the Options menu.
Operating concept
2. Press.
Opening the main menu
Press button.
The main menu is displayed.

All iDrive functions can be called up via the
main menu.
19
At a glance iDrive
Selecting menu items White marks to the left or right indicate that
Highlighted menu items can be selected. additional panels can be opened.
1. Turn the controller until the desired menu Opening the Options menu
item is highlighted.
Press button.
The "Options" menu is displayed.
Menu items in the Owner's Manual

Additional options: move the controller to the
In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be
right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is
selected are set in quotation marks, e.g.,
displayed.
"Settings".
Changing between panels Options menu

The "Options" menu consists of various areas:
After a menu item is selected, e.g., "Radio", a
new panel is displayed. Panels can overlap. ▷ Screen settings, e.g., "Split screen".
▷ Move the controller to the left. ▷ Control options for the selected main
menu, e.g., for "Radio".
Closes current panel and shows previous
display. ▷ If applicable, further operating options for
the selected menu, e.g., "Store station".
Reopens previous display by pressing
BACK button. In this case, the current
panel is not closed.
Changing settings
1. Select a field.
▷ Move the controller to the right.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
Opens new panel on top of previous
is displayed.
screen.
20
iDrive At a glance
Activating/deactivating the functions ▷ To delete a character, swipe to the left on

Several menu items are preceded by a check‐ the touchpad.
box. The checkbox indicates whether the func‐ ▷ To enter a blank space, swipe to the right
tion is activated or deactivated. Selecting the in the center of the touchpad.
menu item activates or deactivates the func‐ ▷ To enter a hyphen, swipe to the right in the
tion. upper area of the touchpad.
Function is activated. ▷ To enter an underscore, swipe to the right
Function is deactivated. in the lower area of the touchpad.
Using interactive map

Touchpad The interactive map in the navigation system
can be moved via the touchpad.
Some iDrive functions can be operated using
the touchpad on the controller. Function Operation
Selecting functions Interactive map. Swipe into respective

direction.
1. "Settings"
2. "Touchpad" Enlarge/shrink in‐ Drag in or out on the
teractive map. touchpad with fingers.
3. Select the desired function.
▷ "Speller": enter letters and numbers. Display menu. Tap once.
▷ "Interactive map": use the interactive
map. Changing settings
▷ "Audio feedback": pronounces entered You can use the touchpad to change Control
letters and numbers. Display settings, for instance volume. Swipe
left or right accordingly.
Entering letters and numbers
Entering letters requires some practice at the
beginning. When entering, pay attention to the
following:
▷ The system distinguishes between upper
and lower-case letters and numbers. To
make entries, it may be necessary to
change between upper and lower-case let‐
ters, numbers and characters, refer to
page 25.
▷ Enter characters as they are displayed on
the Control Display.
▷ Always enter associated characters, such
as accents or periods so that the letter can
be clearly recognized. The set language
determines what input is possible. Where
necessary, enter special characters via the
Controller.
21
At a glance iDrive
Example: setting the clock 6. Turn the Controller to set the hours, and
then press the Controller.
Setting the clock 7. Turn the Controller to set the minutes, and
On the Control Display: then press the Controller.
1. Press button. The main menu is dis‐

played.
Status information
2. Turn the Controller until "Settings" is high‐ Status field
lighted, and then press the Controller.
The following information is displayed in the
status field at the top right:
▷ Time.
▷ Current entertainment source.
▷ Sound output, on/off.
▷ Locatability.
▷ Signal strength of cellular network.
▷ Phone status.
3. If necessary, move the Controller to the left ▷ Traffic bulletin reception.

to display "Time/Date".
Status field symbols
4. Turn the Controller until "Time/Date" is
highlighted, and then press the Controller. The symbols are grouped as follows:
Radio symbols
Symbol Meaning
HD Radio station is being received.
Telephone symbols
Symbol Meaning
5. Turn the Controller until "Time:" is high‐
Incoming or outgoing call.
lighted, and then press the Controller.
Missed call.
Signal strength of cellular network.

Symbol flashes: network search.
Cellular network is not available.
Bluetooth is switched on.
Roaming is active.
SMS text message received.
22
iDrive At a glance
Symbol Meaning Selecting the display

On the Control Display:
Check the SIM card.
SIM card is blocked. 1. Press button.

SIM card is missing. 2. "Split screen"
3. Move the Controller until the split screen is
Enter PIN.
selected.
4. Press the Controller or select "Split screen
Entertainment symbols content".
5. Select the desired menu item.
Symbol Meaning
Music collection.
Gracenote® database.
AUX-IN port.
Additional symbols
Symbol Meaning
The sound output has been

switched off.
Programmable memory
Checking the current vehicle posi‐ buttons
tion.
General information
The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐
Split screen grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
rectly, for instance radio stations, navigation
General information destinations, phone numbers and menu en‐
tries.
Additional information can be displayed on the
right side of the split screen, e.g., information Settings are stored for the profile currently
from the onboard computer. used.
In the divided screen view, the so-called split
screen, this information remains visible even
Saving a function
when switching to another menu. 1. Highlight the function via iDrive.
Switching the split screen on/off 2. Press and hold the desired button,
On the Control Display: until a signal sounds.
Running a function
1. Press button.
Press button.
2. "Split screen"
23
At a glance iDrive
The function will work immediately. This ▷ Navigation, for instance stored destina‐
means, e.g., that the number is dialed when a tions.
phone number is selected. ▷ Phone book.
▷ Online data, for instance Favorites, cook‐
Displaying the key assignment ies.
Touch buttons with finger. Do not wear gloves ▷ Voice notes.
or use objects. ▷ Login accounts.
The button assignment is displayed at the top Altogether, the deletion of the data can take up
edge of screen. to 30 minutes.
Functional requirement
Data can only be deleted while stationary.
Deleting data
Heed and follow the instructions on the Con‐
trol Display.
1. Switch on standby state.

2. "Settings"
Deleting the button assignments 3. Open "Options".
1. Press buttons 1 and 8 simultaneously for
4. "Delete personal data"
approx. 5 seconds.
5. "Continue"
2. "OK"
6. "OK"
Deleting personal data in the

vehicle Entering letters and numbers
General information
Concept
Depending on the usage, the vehicle saves
personal data, such as stored radio stations. 1. Turn the Controller: select letters or num‐
This personal data can be permanently deleted bers.
using iDrive. 2. Select additional letters or numbers, if
needed.
General information
3. "OK": confirm the entry.
Depending on the equipment package, the fol‐
lowing data can be deleted: Symbol Function
▷ Personal Profile settings.
Press the Controller: delete letters
▷ Stored radio stations.
or number.
▷ Stored programmable memory buttons.
Press the Controller for an extended
▷ Travel and Onboard Computer information.
period: delete all letters or numbers.
▷ Music collection.
24
iDrive At a glance
Switching between upper/lower case,

numbers and characters
Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐
tween entering upper and lower case letters
and numbers:
Symbol Function
Enter the letters.
Enter the numbers.
or Tip the Controller up.
Without navigation system

Select the symbol.
Entry comparison
When entering names and addresses, the
choice is narrowed down with every letter en‐
tered and letters may be added automatically.
Entries are continuously compared with data
stored in the vehicle.
▷ Only those letters are offered during entry
for which data is available.
▷ Destination search: place names can be
entered in all languages that are available
on the Control Display.
25
At a glance Voice activation system
Voice activation system

Vehicle features and options so that the spoken commands can be identi‐
fied.
To set the language, refer to page 96.
to the selected options or country versions. Using the voice activation
This also applies to safety-related functions system
systems, the applicable laws and regulations Activating the voice activation system
must be observed.
1. Press button on the steering
wheel.
Concept 2. Wait for the signal.
Most functions displayed on the Control Dis‐ 3. Say the command.
play can be operated by voice commands via A command that is recognized by the voice
the voice activation system. The system sup‐ activation system is announced and dis‐
ports you with announcements during input. played in the instrument cluster.
This symbol in the instrument cluster indi‐
cates that the voice activation system is active.
General information If no other commands are possible, operate
▷ Functions that can only be used when the the function via iDrive.
vehicle is stationary cannot be used via the
voice activation system. Terminating the voice activation
▷ The system uses a special microphone on system
the driver's side. Press the button on the steering
▷ ›...‹ in the Owner's Manual denotes verbal wheel or ›Cancel‹.
instructions to use with the voice activation
system.
▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters Possible commands
smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐
sis, and speed. Most menu items on the Control Display can
be voiced as commands.
▷ Always say commands in the language of
the voice activation system. The available commands depend on the menu
that is currently displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
Functional requirements There are short commands for many functions.
You may select list entries such as phone list
Via the Control Display, set a language that is
entries via voice activation. Read these list en‐
also supported by the voice activation system
tries out loud exactly as they are shown in the
respective list.
26
Voice activation system At a glance
Having possible commands read aloud 3. ›Radio‹

You can have available commands read out 4. ›Tone‹
loud for you: ›Voice commands‹.
E.g., if the "Settings" menu is displayed, the Via short command
commands for the settings are read out loud. The desired tone settings can also be started
via a short command.
Executing functions using short
1. Turn on the Entertainment sound output, if
commands
needed.
Execute functions on the main menu via short
commands. It almost doesn't matter which 2. Press button on the steering
menu item is selected, for instance ›Vehicle wheel.
status‹.
3. ›Tone‹
The list for short commands of the voice acti‐
vation system can be called up via the
Integrated Owner's Manual on the Control Dis‐
play.
Setting the voice dialog
You can set the system to use standard dialog
Help dialog for the voice activation or a short version.
system The short version of the voice dialog plays
Calling up help dialog: ›Help‹. back short messages in abbreviated form.
Additional commands for the help dialog: 1. "Settings"
▷ ›Help with examples‹: announces informa‐ 2. "Language/Units"
tion about the current operating options
3. "Speech type:"
and the most important commands for
them. 4. Select setting.
▷ ›Help with voice activation‹: announces in‐
formation about the principle of operation
for the voice activation system. Adjusting the volume
Turn the volume button during the spoken in‐
structions until the desired volume is set.
Example: opening the tone ▷ The volume remains constant even if the
settings volume of other audio sources is changed.
▷ The volume is stored for the profile cur‐
Via the main menu rently used.
The commands of the menu items are spoken
just as they are selected via the controller.
1. Turn on the Entertainment sound output, if Information on Emergency

needed. Requests
Do not use the voice activation system to ini‐
2. Press button on the steering
tiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situa‐
wheel.
tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change.
This can unnecessarily delay the establish‐
ment of a phone connection.
27
At a glance Voice activation system
Instead, use the SOS button, refer to

page 215, close to the interior mirror.
Environmental conditions
▷ Keep the doors, windows, and glass sun‐
roof closed to prevent noise interference.
▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.
28
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle At a glance
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle

Vehicle features and options Owner's Manual
Search for information and descriptions by en‐
tering terms selected from the index.
Select components
1. Press button.
and systems. When using these functions and 2. Turn the controller: open "Vehicle info".
systems, the applicable laws and regulations 3. Press the controller.
must be observed. 4. Selecting desired range:
▷ "Quick reference"
Integrated Owner's Manual ▷ "Search by pictures"
in the vehicle ▷ "Owner's Manual"
Concept
The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically
describes features and functions found in the
vehicle. The Integrated Owner's Manual can be
displayed on the Control Display.
Components of the Integrated

Owner's Manual
The Integrated Owner's Manual consists of
three parts, which offer various levels of infor‐ Leafing through the Owner's Manual
mation or possible access.
Page by page with link access
Quick Reference Guide Turn the controller until the next or previous
The Quick Reference Guide provides informa‐ page is displayed.
tion on how to operate the vehicle, how to use
basic vehicle functions and what to do in case Page by page without link access
of a breakdown. This information can also be Scroll through the pages directly while skip‐
displayed while driving. ping the links.
Highlight the symbol once. Now simply press
Search by images the Controller to browse from page to page.
Based on illustrations, image search provides
Scroll back.
information and descriptions. This is useful,
e.g., when the terminology for a feature is not
known.
Scroll forward.
29
At a glance Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
Context help - operating instructions Programmable memory buttons

for the currently selected function
The relevant information can be opened di‐ General information
rectly. The Owner's Manual can be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
Opening via iDrive rectly.
Change directly to the Options menu from the
function on the Control Display: Storing
1. "Owner's Manual" Select via iDrive.
1. Press button or move the Controller
to the right repeatedly until the "Options" 2. Press selected button for more
menu is displayed. than 2 seconds.
2. "Display Owner's Manual"
Executing
Opening when a Check Control Press button.
message is displayed The Owner's Manual is displayed im‐
Directly from the Check Control message on mediately.
the Control Display:
"Display Owner's Manual"
Changing between a function and the

operating instructions
To switch from a function, for instance radio, to
the Owner's Manual on the Control Display
and to alternate between the two displays:
1. Press button or move the Controller

to the right repeatedly until the "Options"
menu is displayed.
2. "Display Owner's Manual"
3. Select the desired page in the Owner's
Manual.
4. Press button again to return to last

displayed function.
5. Press button to return to the page of

the Owner's Manual displayed last.
To alternate continuously between the last dis‐
played function and the last displayed page of
the Owner's Manual, repeat steps 4 & 5.
Opens a new display every time.
30
BMW eDRIVE At a glance
BMW eDRIVE
Vehicle features and options Overview

must be observed.
1 Vehicle battery
2 Fuel filler flap
BMW eDRIVE 3 High-voltage battery
Special features of the BMW i 4 Charging socket

5 Drive unit
High-voltage system
This BMW i is an electric vehicle. The vehicle Concept
features a high-voltage system that consists of
The vehicle can be operated emissions free
an electric motor and a high-voltage battery
using its electrical drive system.
among other things.
The special high-voltage battery supplies the
Optionally, the vehicle has a combustion en‐
electric motor as well as the comfort features
gine that generates electrical energy via a gen‐
with power.
erator and thereby increases the range. This
combustion engine is called the Range Ex‐ The high-voltage battery is charged via a
tender, refer to page 72. charging cable, for instance when parked or
while driving by energy recovery.
Carbon body The vehicle can be charged very rapidly at spe‐
The vehicle consists of the functional units: cial charging stations. Charging is also possi‐
ble at household power sockets.
▷ Drive module of aluminum.
On the go, the energy recovery ensures that
▷ Life module of carbon fiber reinforced plas‐
only little energy is lost when braking.
tic, CFRP.
When the vehicle decelerates, the electric mo‐
tor acts as a generator and converts the kinetic
energy released into electric current.
As a result the high-voltage battery is partially
recharged in order to reach maximum range.
An optional Range Extender, refer to
page 72, can supply the drive system with
power and thus increase the range of the vehi‐
cle.
31
At a glance BMW eDRIVE
Functions Display
The eDRIVE displays, refer to page 81, pro‐
Electric driving: eDRIVE vide information about the current state of the
The vehicle is powered exclusively by the elec‐ drive and visualize the system's use in a dia‐
tric motor. The accelerator pedal can be used gram.
not just for acceleration, but also for decelera‐
tion. When the vehicle decelerates, the electric Maximize energy-saving driving and
motor acts as a generator and charges the range
high-voltage battery. With a sensible driving Energy-saving driving is the basic prerequisite
style, this function can be used for especially for as large a range as possible. eDRIVE pro‐
efficient energy recovery and comfortable driv‐ vides various functions that assist with an en‐
ing, using just the accelerator pedal. ergy-saving driving style and help to monitor
the range, and if needed, to increase it. The
Acoustic pedestrian protection following descriptions provide an overview of
Depending on the country-specific version, the the available functions and the personal meas‐
system generates a continuous driving noise ures.
during electric driving at low speeds.
Before driving
Coasting eDRIVE allows using the air conditioner even
An especially efficient operating point is so- before driving off. The stationary climate con‐
called coasting. In this case, the vehicle is de‐ trol, refer to page 143, provides more range
celerated only by driving resistance and no en‐ than using full air conditioning while driving.
ergy flows between high-voltage battery and Parked vehicle ventilation during the charging
electric motor. In order to coast, depress the process can provide maximum range when
accelerator pedal far enough that the mark in driving off.
the instrument cluster, refer to page 81, is
exactly in the center. Trip planning and special functions of
the navigation system
Energy recovery: CHARGE
Several special functions of the navigation sys‐
The high-voltage battery is charged while driv‐ tem support trip planning taking into account
ing through energy recovery. the electric range:
The electric motor acts as a generator and ▷ Range assistant, refer to Integrated Own‐
converts the kinetic energy of the vehicle into er's Manual, checks whether an entered
electric current. navigation destination can be reached. If
Charging can take place in various situations the range is not sufficient, various recom‐
while the vehicle is in motion: mendations to help increase the range are
▷ As soon as the accelerator pedal is only displayed automatically, for instance an al‐
slightly depressed. ternative ECO PRO route is displayed.
▷ During vehicle braking. ▷ Intermodal routing or intermodal informa‐

tion, refer to Integrated Owner's Manual, as
The mark in the instrument cluster is located
route criterion support trip planning using
within the CHARGE range.
public transportation.
Sensible driving and early speed reduction are
important to make full use of the energy recov‐
ery feature.
32
BMW eDRIVE At a glance
▷ Range map indicates the action range on

the navigation map, refer to Integrated
Owner's Manual.
▷ Charging assistant under Points of Interest
in navigation, helps to find and possibly in‐
clude a public charging station in the de‐
sired route, refer to Integrated Owner's
Manual.
During driving
▷ General driving tips, refer to page 168, for
increasing the range.
▷ Use the eDRIVE system efficiently, refer to
page 162, for an optimized driving style.
▷ ECO PRO driving style analysis, refer to
page 171, for driving style analysis.
▷ ECO PRO and ECO PRO+ driving mode,
refer to page 169, for increasing the range.
▷ Display of the fuel consumption history, re‐
fer to page 83.
▷ Display of secondary functions and the po‐
tential range, refer to page 84.
After the trip

▷ Charge vehicle, refer to page 174, and
plan next trip.
▷ Prepare for long downtimes, refer to
page 224.
BMW i Remote app

A special BMW i Remote App allows you to
control and display certain vehicle functions
using a smartphone.
Safety of the high-voltage system

Observe the information on safety, refer to
page 34.
Long-term vehicle storage

Follow the instructions for vehicle storage and
for longer idle periods, refer to page 224.
33
At a glance Safety of the high-voltage system
Safety of the high-voltage system

Safety of the high-voltage
system
Working on the vehicle
DANGER
Improperly executed work, in particular
system and the carbon body as well as acces‐
sories retrofits, can lead to electric shock.
There is a risk of injury, fire and danger to life.
that the work on the vehicle, in particular main‐
authorized BMW i dealer’s service center or
shop.◀
High-voltage system
Contact with water

The high-voltage system is typically safe even
in the following example situations:
▷ Water in the footwell, for instance after a
rainstorm when sunroof was kept open.
▷ Vehicle is in water but only up to the al‐
lowed height.
▷ Fluid escapes in the cargo area.
Automatic deactivation
If an accident occurs, the high-voltage system
is switched off automatically to prevent risk of
danger to occupants and other traffic.
Read the information on What to do after an
accident, refer to page 218.
34
Safety of the high-voltage system At a glance
35
Controls
This chapter is intended to provide you with
information that will give you complete control of
your vehicle. All features and accessories that
are useful for driving and your safety, comfort
and convenience are described here.

Controls Opening and closing
Opening and closing

Vehicle features and options WARNING
Unlocking from the inside is only possi‐
ble with special knowledge.
series. It also describes features that are not Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐
to the selected options or country versions. tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock
This also applies to safety-related functions the vehicle from the outside when there are
and systems. When using these functions and people in it.◀
WARNING
must be observed.
Unattended children or animals can
cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
selves and traffic, e.g., due to the following ac‐
Remote control
tions:
General information ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
The vehicle is supplied with two remote con‐ ▷ Releasing the parking brake.
trols with integrated key. ▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
Each remote control contains a replaceable dows.
battery. Replace the battery, refer to ▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
page 40.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
You may set the key functions depending on
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
the optional features and country-specific ver‐
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
sion. Settings, refer to page 48.
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
The vehicle stores personal settings for every exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
remote control. Personal Profile, refer to
page 46.
Overview
The remote controls hold information about re‐
quired maintenance. Service data in the re‐
mote control, refer to page 207.
Safety information
WARNING
People or animals in the vehicle can lock
the doors from the inside and lock themselves
in. In this case, the vehicle cannot be opened
from the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take 1 Unlocking
the remote control with you so that the vehicle
2 Locking
can be opened from the outside.◀
3 Unlocking the tailgate
4 Panic mode
38
Opening and closing Controls
Unlocking honks twice. In this case, the drive-ready state

must be switched off by means of the Start/
Press button on the remote control.
Stop button.
Depending on the settings, refer to page 48, Switching on interior lights and
the following access points are unlocked. courtesy light
▷ Driver's door.
Press button on the remote control with
Press the button of the remote control the vehicle locked.
again to unlock the other vehicle access
points. This function is not available, if the interior
▷ All doors and tailgate. lights were switched off manually.
In addition, the following functions are exe‐ The light functions may depend on the ambi‐
cuted: ent brightness.
▷ The settings stored in the driver profile, re‐ After locking, wait 10 seconds before pressing
fer to page 46, are applied. the button again.
▷ The interior lights and courtesy lights are

Tailgate
activated. This function is not available, if
the interior lights were switched off man‐
General information
ually.
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place
▷ The welcome lights are switched on, if this
the remote control in the cargo area.
function was activated.
Depending on your vehicle's equipment and
▷ The alarm system, refer to page 49, is
the country version, it is possible to specify
switched off.
whether the doors are also unlocked when un‐
The light functions may depend on the ambi‐ locking with the remote control. Changing set‐
ent brightness. tings, refer to page 48
Convenient opening Safety information

Press and hold this button on the re‐ WARNING
mote control after unlocking.
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
The windows and the glass sunroof are ing the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make
opened, as long as the button on the remote sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
control is pressed. is clear during opening and closing.◀
NOTE
Locking
The tailgate swings back and up when it
1. Close the driver's door.
opens. There is a risk of damage to property.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
2. Press button on the remote control. tailgate is clear during opening and closing.◀
▷ All doors and the tailgate are locked.
NOTE
▷ The alarm system, refer to page 49, is
switched on. Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit
the rear window and heat conductors while
If the drive-ready state is still switched on
driving. There is a risk of property damage.
when you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn
39
Cover the edges and ensure that pointed ob‐ 3. Push battery in the direction of the arrow
jects do not hit the rear window.◀ using a pointed object and lift it out.
Opening
Press button on the remote control for
approx. 1 second.
The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung up‐

ward.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find 4. Insert a type CR 2032 battery with the pos‐
yourself in a dangerous situation. itive side facing up.
▷ Press button on the remote con‐ 5. Press the cover closed.
trol and hold for at least 3 sec‐ 6. Push the integrated key into the remote
onds. control until it engages.
▷ Briefly press the button on the remote con‐ Have old batteries disposed of by a
trol three times in succession. dealer’s service center or another
To switch off the alarm: press any button. qualified service center or repair shop
or take them to a collection point.
Replacing the battery
1. Remove the integrated key from the re‐ Additional remote controls
mote control, refer to page 41. Additional remote controls are available from a
2. Place the integrated key underneath the dealer’s service center or another qualified
battery compartment cover, arrow 1, and service center or repair shop.
lift the cover with a lever movement of the
integrated key, arrow 2. Loss of the remote controls
A lost remote control can be blocked and re‐
placed by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Malfunction
General information
A Check Control message is displayed.
Remote control detection by the vehicle may
malfunction under the following circumstan‐
ces:
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐
charged. Replacing the battery, refer to
page 40.
40
▷ Interference of the radio connection from Integrated key

transmission towers or other equipment
with high transmitting power. General information
▷ Shielding of the remote control due to The driver's door can be locked and unlocked
metal objects. without remote control using the integrated
Do not transport the remote control to‐ key.
gether with metal objects.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from Safety information
mobile phones or other electronic devices WARNING
in direct proximity to the remote control.
Unlocking from the inside is only possi‐
Do not transport the remote control to‐ ble with special knowledge.
gether with electronic devices.
Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐
▷ Interference of radio transmission by a cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐
charging process of mobile devices, for in‐ tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock
stance charging of a mobile phone. the vehicle from the outside when there are
In the case of interference, the vehicle can be people in it.◀
unlocked and locked from the outside with the
NOTE
integrated key, refer to page 41.
The door lock is permanently joined with
Switching the drive-ready state on via the door. The door handle can be moved.
emergency detection of the remote When pulling the door handle with the
control integrated key inserted, paint or key can be
damaged. There is a risk of property damage.
Remove the integrated key before pulling the
outside door handle.◀
Removing
1. Hold the remote control with its back

against the marked area on the steering
column.
2. Switch on drive-ready state within 10 sec‐
onds.
Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the
If the remote control is not detected, slightly
integrated key, arrow 2.
change the position of the remote control and
repeat the procedure.
Locking/unlocking via the door lock
1. Remove lid on the door lock.
41
To do this, slide the integrated key into the Buttons for the central
opening from below and unlock the lid.
locking system
General information
In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle is
automatically unlocked. The hazard warning
system and interior lights come on.
Overview
2. Unlock or lock the door lock using the

integrated key.
Buttons for the central locking system.
Locking
The other doors must be unlocked or locked Press the button with the doors
from the inside. closed.
The vehicle is not secured against theft when

Alarm system
locking.
The alarm system is not switched on if the ve‐
hicle is locked with the integrated key. Unlocking
The alarm system is triggered when the door is
Press button.
opened, if the vehicle has been unlocked via
the door lock.
The vehicle locks automatically after you drive
In order to stop the alarm, unlock the vehicle off.
with the remote control or establish the radio-
ready state, if needed, through emergency de‐
Opening
tection of the remote control, refer to page 41.
▷ Press button to unlock the doors
together, and then pull the door handle
above the armrest.
▷ Pull the door opener on the door to be
opened. The other door remain locked.
42
Rear doors General information

Comfort Access supports the following func‐
General information tions:
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that the ▷ Unlocking and locking the vehicle.
front safety belt is completely wound up.
▷ Convenient closing.
Overview ▷ Open the tailgate.
Functional requirements
▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control
must be located outside of the vehicle near
the doors.
▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
Unlocking
The door openers are located on the inside,
next to the front safety belts.
Opening
1. Open the corresponding front door.
2. Pull door opener backward.
To better reach the front door's handle fold the
front seat's backrests, refer to page 56,
down. Grasp the door handle on the driver's or front
passenger door completely.
Closing This corresponds with pressing the button
When closing, make sure that the correspond‐ on the remote control.
ing front door is far enough open.
Locking
Comfort Access
Concept
The vehicle can be accessed without activat‐
ing the remote control.
All you need to do is to have the remote con‐
trol with you, such as in your pants pocket.
The vehicle automatically detects the remote
control when it is in close proximity or in the
Touch the surface on the door handle of the
vehicle's interior.
driver's or front passenger door with your fin‐
43
ger for approx. 1 second without grasping the unintentionally move your foot or if something
door handle. else moves in the detection area.
This corresponds with pressing the button The sensor has an approximate range of
on the remote control. 5 ft/1.50 m extending from the rear of the vehi‐
cle.
Convenient closing If the tailgate is opened via Comfort Access,
locked doors are not unlocked.
Safety information
Safety information
WARNING
WARNING
With convenient closing, body parts can
be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
that the area of movement of the doors is clear ing the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make
during convenient closing.◀ sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.◀
Closing NOTE
Make sure that the area of movement of the
tailgate is clear during opening and closing.◀
NOTE
Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit
Touch the surface on the door handle of the Cover the edges and ensure that pointed ob‐
driver's or front passenger door, arrow, with jects do not hit the rear window.◀
your finger and hold it there without grasping
the door handle. Opening
This corresponds with pressing and holding
the button on the remote control.
In addition to locking, the windows and the

glass sunroof close and the exterior mirrors
fold in.
Opening the tailgate
General information
Press button next on tailgate.
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place
the remote control in the cargo area. This corresponds with pressing the button
If the remote control is in the sensor area, the on the remote control.
tailgate may open or close inadvertently if you The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung up‐
ward.
44
Malfunction Unlocking from the inside

Remote control detection by the vehicle may With the vehicle is stationary, press
malfunction under the following circumstan‐ the button in the driver's floor area.
ces:
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐ The hood is unlocked and slightly raised.
charged. Replace the battery, refer to
page 40. Opening
▷ Interference of the radio connection from 1. Press the release handle and open the
transmission towers or other equipment hood.
with high transmitting power.
▷ Shielding of the remote control due to
metal objects.
Do not transport the remote control to‐
gether with metal objects.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
mobile phones or other electronic devices
in direct proximity to the remote control.
Do not transport the remote control to‐
gether with electronic devices. Malfunction
In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock In case of an electrical malfunction, the hood
the vehicle using the buttons of the remote can be unlocked manually.
control or using the integrated key, refer to
page 41. 1. Remove cover underneath the unlock but‐
tons.
Hood
Safety information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when open‐
ing and closing the hood. There is a risk of in‐
jury. Make sure that the area of movement of
hood is clear during opening and closing.◀
2. Remove wire cable and pull it back.
NOTE The hood is unlocked and slightly raised.
Folded-away wipers can be jammed
when the hood is opened. There is a risk of
property damage. Make sure that the wipers Tailgate
with the wiper blades mounted are folded
down onto the windshield before opening the General information
hood.◀ To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place
the remote control in the cargo area.
45
Depending on your vehicle's equipment and ▷ Press button on the remote con‐
the country version, it is possible to specify trol for approx. 1 second.
whether the doors are also unlocked when un‐ Depending on the setting, the doors may
locking with the remote control. Changing set‐ also be unlocked. Unlocking with the re‐
tings, refer to page 48 mote control, refer to page 39.
The tailgate is opened slightly and can be
Safety information
swung upward.
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐ Opening from the inside
ing the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make With the vehicle stationary, press the
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate button in the driver's floor area twice
is clear during opening and closing.◀ in quick succession.
NOTE If the vehicle is locked, selector lever position
P must be engaged first.
Make sure that the area of movement of the Closing
tailgate is clear during opening and closing.◀
NOTE
Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit
Cover the edges and ensure that pointed ob‐
jects do not hit the rear window.◀
Opening and closing

Grasp the recess grip and pull tailgate down.
Opening from the outside
Personal Profile
Concept
Via Personal Profiles, individual settings for
several drivers can be stored and called up
again when required.
General information
▷ Without Comfort Access: unlock vehicle. There are three driver profiles with which per‐
sonal vehicle settings can be stored. Every re‐
With Comfort Access: unlock the vehicle or
mote control has one of these driver profiles
have the remote control with you.
assigned.
Press button next on tailgate.
If the vehicle is unlocked using a remote con‐
trol, the assigned personal driver profile will be
46
activated. All settings stored in the driver pro‐ ▷ Volumes, tone.

file are automatically applied. ▷ Control Display.
If several drivers use their own remote control, ▷ Navigation.
the vehicle will adjust the personal settings
▷ PDC Park Distance Control.
during unlocking. These settings are also re‐
stored, if the vehicle has been used in the ▷ Rearview camera.
meantime by a person with a different remote ▷ Driving Dynamics Control.
control. ▷ Intelligent Safety.
Changes to the settings are automatically
stored in the driver profile currently activated. Profile management
If another driver profile is selected via iDrive,
the settings stored in it will be applied auto‐ Opening profiles
matically. The new driver profile is assigned to Regardless of the remote control in use, a dif‐
the remote control currently used. ferent profile may be activated. This allows you
There is an additional guest profile available to call up personal vehicle settings, even if you
that is not assigned to any remote control: it did not unlock the vehicle with your own re‐
can be used to apply settings in the vehicle mote control.
without changing the personal driver profiles. Using iDrive:
1. "Settings"
For the system to be able to identify the driver 2. "Profiles"
profile associated to a particular driver, the de‐ 3. Select a profile.
tected remote control must be clearly allo‐ The following functions are executed:
cated to the driver.
▷ All settings stored in the called-up profile
This is the case when: are automatically applied.
▷ The driver is only carrying his or her own ▷ The called-up profile is assigned to the re‐
remote control. mote control being used at the time.
▷ The driver unlocks the vehicle. ▷ If the profile is already assigned to a differ‐
▷ The driver gets into the vehicle through the ent remote control, this profile will apply to
driver's door. both remote controls.
Settings Using a guest profile

The settings for the following systems and The guest profile is for individual settings that
functions are stored in the active profile. The are stored in none of the three personal pro‐
scope of storable settings depends on country files.
and equipment. Using iDrive:
▷ Unlocking and locking.
1. "Settings"
▷ Lights.
2. "Profiles"
▷ Climate control.
3. "Guest"
▷ Radio.
The guest profile cannot be renamed. It is not
▷ Instrument cluster. assigned to the current remote control.
▷ Programmable memory buttons.
47
Renaming profiles Existing settings are overwritten with the im‐

A personal name can be assigned to every pro‐ ported profile.
file to avoid confusion between the profiles. Using iDrive:
Using iDrive: 1. "Settings"
1. "Settings" 2. "Profiles"
2. "Profiles" 3. "Import profile"
The active profile is selected. 4. BMW Online: "BMW Online"
3. Open "Options". USB interface: "USB device"
4. "Rename current profile"
Display profile list during start
Reset profiles The profile list can be displayed during each
The settings of the profile currently in use are start to select the desired profile.
reset to their factory settings. Using iDrive:
1. "Settings" 2. "Profiles"
2. "Profiles" 3. Open "Options".
3. Open "Options". 4. "Display user list at startup"
4. "Reset current profile"
System limits
Exporting profiles A clear assignment between the remote con‐
Most settings of the profile currently in use can trol and driver may not be possible in the fol‐
be exported. lowing cases, for example.
Exporting can be helpful for storing and re‐ ▷ The passenger unlocks the vehicle with his
trieving personal settings, for instance before or her own remote control, but another
delivering the vehicle to a workshop. Profiles person is driving.
can be taken to another vehicle equipped with ▷ The driver unlocks the vehicle via Comfort
the Personal Profile function. Access and has multiple remote controls
Using iDrive: with him or her.
▷ The driver changes, but the vehicle is not
1. "Settings"
locked and unlocked.
2. "Profiles"
▷ Multiple remote controls are located out‐
3. "Export profile" side of the vehicle.
4. BMW Online: "BMW Online"
USB interface: "USB device"
Settings
Importing profiles
General information
Profiles exported via BMW Online can also be
imported via BMW Online. Depending on your vehicle's equipment and
the country version, various settings for open‐
Profiles stored on a USB storage device can be
ing and closing are possible.
imported via the USB interface.
48
These settings are stored for the driver profile, Unlocking is signaled by one honk of
refer to page 46, currently used. the horn.
▷ "Flash when lock/unlock"
Unlocking
Unlocking is signaled by two flashes,
locking by one.
Doors
Using iDrive: Automatic locking
1. "Settings" Using iDrive:
2. "Doors/key" 1. "Settings"
3. Select the symbol. 2. "Doors/key"
4. Select the desired function: 3. Select the desired function:
▷ "Driver's door only" ▷ "Lock if no door is opened"
Only the driver's door is unlocked. The vehicle locks automatically after a
Pressing again unlocks the entire vehi‐ short period of time if no door is
cle. opened after unlocking.
▷ "All doors"
The entire vehicle is unlocked. Headlight courtesy delay feature/
stationary climate control
Tailgate Using iDrive:
1. "Settings" 2. "Doors/key"
2. "Doors/key" 3. Select the symbol.
3. Select the symbol. 4. Select the desired function:
4. Select the desired function: ▷ "Pathway lighting"
▷ "Tailgate" Headlight courtesy delay feature.
The tailgate is unlocked. ▷ "Comfort climate control"
▷ "Tailgate + door(s)" Stationary climate control.
The tailgate and the doors are un‐
locked.
Alarm system
Confirmation signals from the vehicle
Using iDrive: General information
When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm
1. "Settings" system reacts to the following changes:
2. "Doors/key" ▷ Unauthorized opening of a door, the hood
3. Deactivate or activate the desired confir‐ or the tailgate.
mation signals. ▷ Movements in the car's interior.
▷ With alarm system: ▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, for instance
"Acoustic sig. lock/unlock" during attempts at stealing a wheel.
49
▷ Disconnected battery voltage. To switch off the alarm: press any button.
▷ Improper use of the socket for Onboard Di‐
agnosis. Indicator light on the interior mirror
The alarm system signals these changes visu‐
ally and acoustically:
▷ Acoustic alarm.
Depending on local regulations, the acous‐
tic alarm may be suppressed.
▷ By switching on the hazard warning sys‐
tem.
▷ By flashing the daytime running lights.
▷ The indicator light flashes briefly every
Switching on and off 2 seconds:
When you lock and unlock the vehicle with the The alarm system is switched on.
remote control or with Comfort Access, the
▷ Indicator light flashes for approx. 10 sec‐
alarm system is switched on and off at the
onds, then it flashes briefly every 2 sec‐
same time.
onds:
Opening the doors with the alarm Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor
system switched on are not active, as doors, hood, or tailgate
are not correctly closed. Correctly closed
The alarm system is triggered when a door is
access points are secured.
opened if the door was unlocked using the
integrated key in the door lock. When the still open access points are
closed, interior motion sensor and tilt alarm
Switching off the alarm, refer to page 51.
sensor will be switched on.
Opening the tailgate with the alarm ▷ The indicator light goes out after unlock‐
system switched on ing:
The tailgate can be opened even when the The vehicle has not been tampered with.
alarm system is switched on. ▷ The indicator light flashes after unlocking
After the tailgate is closed, it is locked and until the radio-ready state is switched on,
monitored again provided the doors are but no longer than approx. 5 minutes:
locked. The hazard warning system flashes An alarm has been triggered.
once.
Tilt alarm sensor
Panic mode
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation. The alarm system responds in situations such
as attempts to steal a wheel.
▷ Press button on the remote con‐
trol and hold for at least 3 sec‐ Interior motion sensor
onds.
The windows and the glass sunroof must be
▷ Briefly press the button on the remote con‐ closed for the system to function properly.
trol three times in succession.
50
Avoiding unintentional alarms Power windows

General information Safety information
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐
WARNING
sor can trigger an alarm, although no unauthor‐
ized action occurred. When operating the windows, body parts
and objects can be jammed. There is a risk of
Possible situations for an unwanted alarm:
injury or risk of property damage. Make sure
▷ In automatic vehicle washes. that the area of movement of the windows is
▷ In duplex garages. clear during opening and closing.◀
▷ During transport on trains carrying vehi‐ WARNING
cles, at sea or on a trailer.
▷ With animals in the vehicle. cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
The tilt alarm sensor and the interior motion selves and traffic, e.g., due to the following ac‐
sensor can be switched off in such situations. tions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
interior motion sensor
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
Press the remote control button again
dows.
within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle
is locked. ▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
The indicator lamp lights up for approx. 2 sec‐ ▷ Using vehicle equipment.
onds and then continues to flash. There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐ leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
sor are turned off until the vehicle is locked hicle. Take the remote control with you when
again. exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
Overview
Switching off the alarm
▷ Unlock the vehicle with the remote control
or establish radio-ready state, if needed
through emergency detection of remote
control, refer to page 40.
▷ With Comfort Access:
If you are carrying the remote control on
your person, grasp the door handle on the
driver's or front passenger door com‐
pletely.
Power windows
Opening
▷ Press the switch to the resistance

point.
51
The window opens while the switch is be‐ Closing without the jam protection
ing held. system
In case of danger from the outside or if ice
▷ Press the switch beyond the resist‐ might prevent normal closing, proceed as fol‐
ance point. lows:
The window opens automatically. Pressing
the switch again stops the motion. 1. Pull the switch past the resistance
Convenient opening via the remote control, re‐ point and hold it there.
fer to page 39. The window closes with limited jam pro‐
tection . If the closing force exceeds a spe‐
Closing cific threshold, closing is interrupted.
▷ Pull the switch to the resistance 2. Pull the switch past the resistance
point. point again within approx. 4 seconds and
The window closes while the switch is be‐ hold it there.
ing held. The window closes without jam protec‐
tion .
▷ Pull the switch beyond the resistance
point.
The window closes automatically if the Glass sunroof, electric
door is closed. Pulling again stops the mo‐
tion. General information
Closing via Comfort Access, refer to page 44. The glass sunroof and the sliding visor can be
operated together or separately using the
Pinch protection system same switch.
The glass sunroof is operational when the igni‐
General information tion is switched on.
If closing force exceeds a specific threshold as
a window closes, closing is interrupted. Safety information
The window opens slightly. WARNING
Safety information
ing the glass sunroof. There is a risk of injury.
WARNING Make sure that the area of movement of the
Accessories on the windows such as an‐ glass sunroof is clear during opening and clos‐
tennas can impact jam protection. There is a ing.◀
risk of injury. Do not install accessories in the
WARNING
area of movement of the windows.◀
selves and traffic, e.g., due to the following ac‐
tions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
52
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐ Pressing the switch upward stops the mo‐
dows. tion.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N. ▷ Open and close the sliding visors manually.
Convenient opening via the remote control, re‐
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not fer to page 39.
Closing by means of Comfort Access, refer to
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
page 43.
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
Comfort position
Overview If the glass sunroof is not completely opened
automatically, the comfort position has been
attained. In this position the wind noises in the
interior are the least.
If desired, continue the movement by pressing
the switch.
Jam protection system
General information
If the closing force exceeds a certain value
Tilting the glass sunroof when closing the glass sunroof, the closing op‐
Push switch briefly upward. eration is interrupted once the roof reaches the
▷ The closed glass sunroof half-open position. The glass sunroof opens
tilts. slightly.
▷ The opened glass sunroof

Closing from the open position
closes until it is in the tilted
without jam protection
position. The sliding visor
does not move. If there is an external danger, proceed as fol‐
lows:
Opening/closing the glass sunroof and 1. Push the switch forward past the resist‐
sliding visor together ance point and hold.
▷ Press the switch in the de‐ The glass sunroof closes with limited jam
sired direction to the resist‐ protection. If the closing force exceeds a
ance point and hold it there. specific threshold, closing is interrupted.
The glass sunroof moves as

long as the switch is held
down.
▷ Press the switch in the desired direction
past the resistance point.
2. Push the switch forward again past the re‐
The glass sunroof moves automatically.
sistance point and hold until the glass sun‐
roof closes without jam protection. Make
sure that the closing area is clear.
53
Closing from the raised position

without jam protection
If there is an external danger,
push the switch forward past the
resistance point and hold it.
The glass sunroof closes with‐
out jam protection.
Initializing after a power interruption
General information
After a power failure during the opening or
closing process, the glass sunroof can only be
operated to a limited extent.
The system can be initialized under the follow‐
ing conditions.
▷ The vehicle is parked in a horizontal posi‐
tion.
▷ The drive-ready state is established.
▷ The external temperature is above
41 ℉/5 ℃.
During initialization, the glass sunroof closes
without jam protection .
Make sure that the closing area is clear.
Initializing the system

Press the switch up and hold it
until the initialization is com‐
plete:
Initialization begins within
15 seconds and is completed
when the glass sunroof is completely closed.
54
Settings Controls
Settings
Vehicle features and options sliding under the safety belt in an accident.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Ad‐
This chapter describes all standard, country- just the seat prior to starting the trip. Adjust
specific and optional features offered with the the backrest so that it is in the most upright
series. It also describes features that are not position as possible and do not adjust again
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due while driving.◀
This also applies to safety-related functions WARNING
and systems. When using these functions and There is a risk of jamming when moving
systems, the applicable laws and regulations the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of
must be observed. property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐
justment.◀
Sitting safely
An ideal seating position that meets the needs Adjusting seats
of the occupants can make a vital contribution
to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. Overview
In the event of an accident, the correct seating
position plays an important role. Additionally,
observe the following chapters for safe driving:
▷ Seats, refer to page 55.
▷ Safety belts, refer to page 57.
▷ Head restraints, refer to page 58.
▷ Airbags, refer to page 101.
1 Forward/backward 56
Seats 2 Height 56
Safety information 3 Backrest tilt 56
WARNING
Seat adjustments while driving can lead
to unexpected movements of the seat. Vehicle
control could be lost. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. Only adjust the seat on the driver's side
when the vehicle is stationary.◀
WARNING
With a backrest inclined too far to the
rear, the protective effect of the safety belt
cannot be ensured anymore. There is a risk of
55
Controls Settings
Forward/backward Assistance with entering the vehicle in

the rear
Safety information
WARNING
There is a risk of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐
justment.◀
Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired
direction. WARNING
After releasing the lever, move the seat for‐ Unexpected movements of the backrest
ward or back slightly making sure it engages while driving may occur due to an unlocked
properly. backrest. Vehicle control could be lost. There
is a risk of injury. Fold back and lock the back‐
rests before driving.◀
Height
Fold down seat back
1. Pull lever up to the stop.
Pull the lever and apply your weight to the seat

or lift it off, as necessary.
2. Fold backrest forward.

Backrest tilt
Backrest returns to its initial position after re‐
lease.
Pull the lever and apply your weight to the

backrest or lift it off, as necessary.
56
Settings Controls
Front seat heating though airbags enhance safety by providing

added protection, they are not a substitute for
Overview safety belts.
The upper shoulder strap's anchorage point
will be correct for adult seat occupants of ev‐
ery build if the seat is correctly adjusted.
Safety information
WARNING
If the safety belt is used to buckle more
than one person, the protective effect of the
safety belt can no longer be ensured. There is
Seat heating a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not allow
more than one person to wear a single safety
belt. Infants and children are not allowed on an
Switching on occupant's lap, but must be transported and
secured in designated child restraint sys‐
Press button once for each tempera‐
tems.◀
ture level.
The maximum temperature is reached when WARNING
three LEDs are lit. The protective effect of the safety belts
If the trip is continued within approx. 15 mi‐ can be limited or lost when safety belts are fas‐
nutes after a stop, seat heating is activated au‐ tened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened
tomatically with the temperature selected last. safety belt can cause additional injuries, e.g., in
If ECO PRO+, refer to page 169, is activated, the event of an accident or during braking and
the seat heating is deactivated. evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injuries or
danger to life. Make sure that all occupants are
wearing safety belts correctly.◀
Switching off
WARNING
Press and hold the button, until the
LEDs go out. The protective effect of the safety belts
may not be fully functional or fail in the follow‐
ing situations:
▷ The safety belts or safety belt buckles are
Safety belts damaged, soiled, or changed in any other
way.
Number of safety belts and safety belt
buckles ▷ Belt tensioners or belt retractors were
modified.
The vehicle is fitted with four safety belts to
ensure occupant safety. However, they can Safety belts can be imperceptibly damaged in
only offer protection when adjusted correctly. the event of an accident. There is a risk of inju‐
ries or danger to life. Do not modify safety
General information belts, safety belt buckles, belt tensioners, belt
retractors or belt anchors and keep them
Always make sure that safety belts are being
clean. Have the safety belts checked after an
worn by all occupants before driving off. Al‐
57
Controls Settings
accident at the dealer’s service center or an‐ Safety belt reminder for driver's and
other qualified service center or repair shop.◀ passenger's seat
Correct use of safety belts Display

▷ Wear the safety belt twist-free and tight to The indicator light lights up and a sig‐
your body over your lap and shoulders. nal sounds. Make sure that the safety
▷ Wear the safety belt deep on your hips belts are positioned correctly. The
over your lap. The safety belt may not safety belt reminder is active at speeds above
press on your stomach. approx. 6 mph/10 km/h. The safety belt re‐
minder can also be activated if objects are
▷ Do not rub the safety belt against sharp placed on the front passenger seat.
edges, or guide it or jam it in across hard or
fragile objects.
▷ Avoid thick clothing.
▷ Re-tighten the safety belt frequently up‐
Front head restraints
ward around your upper body.
Safety information
Buckling the safety belt WARNING
1. Slowly guide the safety belt out of the A missing protective effect due to re‐
holder when fastening it. moved or not correctly adjusted head re‐
straints can cause injuries in the head and
2. Insert the tongue plate into the safety belt
neck area. There is a risk of injury.
buckle. The safety belt buckle must en‐
gage audibly. ▷ Before driving, install the removed head re‐
straints on the occupied seats.
▷ Adjust the head restraint so its center sup‐
ports the back of the head at as close to
eye level as possible.
▷ Adjust the distance so that the head re‐
straint is as close as possible to the back of
the head. If necessary, adjust the distance
by adjusting the tilt of the backrest.◀
WARNING
Objects on the head restraint reduce the
Unbuckling the safety belt
protective effect in the head and neck area.
1. Hold the safety belt firmly. There is a risk of injury.
2. Press the red button in the belt buckle. ▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
3. Guide the safety belt back into its roll-up ▷ Do not hang objects, e.g., clothes hangers,
mechanism. directly on the head restraint.
▷ Only use accessories that have been de‐
termined to be safe for attachment to a
head restraint.
▷ Do not use any accessories, e.g., pillows,
while driving.◀
58
Settings Controls
Adjusting the height ▷ Do not hang objects, e.g., clothes hangers,

The height of the head restraints cannot be ad‐ directly on the head restraint.
justed. ▷ Only use accessories that have been de‐
termined to be safe for attachment to a
Distance head restraint.
The spacing is adjusted to the back of the ▷ Do not use any accessories, e.g., pillows,
head using the incline of the seat backrest. while driving.◀
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint
is as close as possible to the back of the head. Height
Removing Settings
The head restraints cannot be removed.
Rear head restraints

Safety information
WARNING
A missing protective effect due to re‐
moved or not correctly adjusted head re‐
▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
straints can cause injuries in the head and
push the head restraint down.
neck area. There is a risk of injury.
▷ To raise: push the head restraint up.
▷ Before driving, install the removed head re‐
straints on the occupied seats.
▷ Adjust the head restraint so its center sup‐ Folding down the head restraint
ports the back of the head at as close to Only fold the head restraint back if no one will
eye level as possible. be sitting in the seat in question.
▷ Adjust the distance so that the head re‐
straint is as close as possible to the back of
the head. If necessary, adjust the distance
by adjusting the tilt of the backrest.◀
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when moving
the head restraint. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement is clear
when moving the head restraint.◀
▷ To the back: press the button, arrow 1, and
WARNING fold the head restraint back, arrow 2.
Objects on the head restraint reduce the ▷ To the front: fold head restraint forward un‐
protective effect in the head and neck area. til the head restraint engages.
There is a risk of injury.
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
59
Controls Settings
Removing Overview
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be
sitting in the seat in question.
1 Settings 60
2 Left/right, Automatic Curb Monitor, Auto‐
1. Fold down the rear seat backrest, refer to matic cornering adjustment
page 154. 3 Folding in and out 61
2. Raise the head restraint up against the re‐
sistance.
Selecting a mirror
3. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the
head restraint out completely. To change over to the other mirror:
Slide the switch.
Mirrors Adjusting electrically
Exterior mirrors Press button.

The mirror movement follows the but‐
General information ton movement.
The mirror on the front passenger side is more
curved than the driver's side mirror. Malfunction
In case of an electrical malfunction, adjust the
Safety information mirror by pressing the edges of the mirror
WARNING glass.
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer
than they appear. The distance to the traffic Automatic cornering adjustment
behind could be incorrectly estimated, for in‐
stance while changing lanes. There is a risk of Concept
an accident. Estimate the distance to the traffic During right-hand turns, the mirror glass is
behind by looking over your shoulder.◀ turned. Provides a better view of the vehicle
sideways.
Safety information
WARNING
The system does not release from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess visi‐
bility and traffic situation. There is a risk of an
60
Settings Controls
accident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic Automatic dimming feature
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively The exterior mirror on the driver's side is auto‐
intervene in the respective situations.◀ matically dimmed. Photocells in the interior
mirror are used to control this.
Requirements
▷ Vehicle moving. Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior
mirror
▷ Speed less than 12 mph/20 km/h.
▷ Turn signal is set. Concept
If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on
Activating
the front passenger side is tilted downward.
This improves your view of the curb and other
Slide the switch to the driver's side
low-lying obstacles when parking, for instance.
mirror position.
Activating
Deactivating
Slide the switch to the passenger side mirror 1. Slide the switch to the driver's side
position. mirror position.
2. Engage selector lever position R.
Folding in and out
NOTE Deactivating
Depending on the vehicle width, the ve‐ Slide the switch to the passenger side mirror
hicle can be damaged in vehicle washes. There position.
is a risk of property damage. Before washing,
fold in the mirrors by hand or with the button.◀ Interior mirror, manually dimmable
Press button. Flip lever
Possible at speeds up to approx.

15 mph/20 km/h.
Fold the mirrors in and out is advantageous in
the following situations:
▷ In vehicle washes.
▷ On narrow roads.
▷ For folding mirrors back out that were
folded away manually.
To reduce the blinding effect of the interior
Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐
mirror, flip the lever forward.
matically at a speed of approx.
25 mph/40 km/h.
Automatic heating
Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated
whenever drive-ready state is switched on.
61
Controls Settings
Interior mirror, automatic dimming Settings

feature
Overview
1. Fold the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred
height and angle to suit your seating posi‐
Photocells are used for control: tion.
▷ In the mirror glass. 3. Fold the lever back up.
▷ On the back of the mirror.
▷ Keep the photocells clean.
▷ Do not cover the area between the inside
rearview mirror and the windshield.
Steering wheel
Safety information
WARNING
Steering wheel adjustments while driving
can lead to unexpected steering wheel move‐
ments. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a
risk of an accident. Adjust the steering wheel
while the vehicle is stationary only.◀
62
Transporting children safely Controls
Transporting children safely

The right place for children

Safety information system can no longer be used due to their age,
weight, and size.
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can Safety information
selves and traffic, e.g., due to the following ac‐ WARNING
tions: The safety belt cannot be fastened cor‐
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button. rectly on children shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm
without suitable additional child restraint sys‐
tems. The protective effect of the safety belts
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐ can be limited or lost when safety belts are fas‐
dows. tened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened
▷ Engaging selector lever position N. safety belt can cause additional injuries, for in‐
▷ Using vehicle equipment. stance in the event of an accident or during
braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not of injuries or danger to life. Secure children
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐ shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm using suitable child
hicle. Take the remote control with you when restraint systems.◀
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
Children on the front passenger seat

Always transport children in the rear
seat General information
Should it ever be necessary to use a child re‐
General information
straint system in the front passenger seat,
Accident research shows that the safest place make sure that the front, knee and side airbags
for children is in the rear seat. on the front passenger side are deactivated.
Transport children younger than 13 years of Automatic deactivation of front-seat passen‐
age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm only in the rear ger airbags, refer to page 103.
seat in suitable child restraint systems de‐
signed for the age, weight and size of the child.
Children 13 years of age or older must wear a
safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint
63
Controls Transporting children safely
Safety information WARNING

WARNING The stability of the child restraint system
is limited or compromised with incorrect seat
Active front-seat passenger airbags can
adjustment or improper installation of the child
injure a child in a child restraint system when
seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
the airbags are activated. There is a risk of in‐
Make sure that the child restraint system fits
jury. Make sure that the front-seat passenger
securely against the backrest. If possible, ad‐
airbags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐
just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests
GER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp lights up.◀
and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that
WARNING seats and backrests are securely engaged. If
possible, adjust the height of the head re‐
The stability of the child restraint system
straints or remove them.◀
adjustment or improper installation of the child
seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. On the front passenger seat
securely against the backrest. If possible, ad‐ Deactivating airbags
just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests WARNING
and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that
Active front-seat passenger airbags can
seats and backrests are securely engaged. If
injure a child in a child restraint system when
possible, adjust the height of the head re‐
the airbags are activated. There is a risk of in‐
straints or remove them.◀
jury. Make sure that the front-seat passenger
airbags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐
GER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp lights up.◀
Installing child restraint
After installing a child restraint system in the
systems front passenger seat, make sure that the front,
knee and side airbags on the front passenger
Safety information side are deactivated.
WARNING Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbags
The protective effect of damaged child automatically, refer to page 103.
restraint systems or of child restraint systems
exposed to an accident and their fastening Seat position and height
systems can be limited or lost. A child can Before installing a child restraint system, move
e.g.,not sufficiently restrained, e.g., in the the front passenger seat as far back as possi‐
event of an accident or braking and evasive ble and bring it as far up as possible to obtain
maneuvers. There is a risk of injuries or danger the best possible position for the belt and to
to life. Have damaged child restraint systems offer optimal protection in the event of an acci‐
or of child restraint systems exposed to an ac‐ dent.
cident and their fastening systems checked
If the upper anchorage of the safety belt is lo‐
and possibly replaced by the dealer’s service
cated in front of the belt guide of the child seat,
center or another qualified service center or re‐
move the passenger seat carefully forward un‐
pair shop.◀
til the best possible belt guide position is
reached.
64
Transporting children safely Controls
Child seat security Locking the safety belt

1. Pull out the belt strap completely.
2. Secure the child restraint system with the
safety belt.
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in and pull
it tight against the child restraint system.
The safety belt is locked.
Unlocking the safety belt

1. Unbuckle the belt buckle.
The rear safety belts and the front passenger
2. Remove the child restraint system.
safety belt can be permanently locked to fas‐
ten child restraint systems. 3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in com‐
pletely.
LATCH child restraint fixing system

General information Position
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil‐ The corresponding symbol shows the
dren. mounts for the lower LATCH anchors.
Pay attention to the operating and safety infor‐ Seats equipped with lower anchors are
mation of the child restraint system manufac‐ marked with a pair, 2, of LATCH sym‐
turer when installing and using LATCH child bols.
restraint fixing systems.
Before installing LATCH child
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors restraint fixing systems
The lower anchors may be used to attach the Pull the safety belt away from the area of the
CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child child restraint system.
and CRS weight of 65 lb/30 kg when the child
is restrained by the internal harnesses.
Assembly of LATCH child restraint
fixing systems
Safety information
1. Install child restraint system, see manufac‐
WARNING turer's information.
If the LATCH child restraint fixing sys‐ 2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐
tems are not correctly engaged, the protective erly connected.
effect of the LATCH child restraint fixing sys‐
tem can be limited. There is a risk of injuries or Child restraint systems with tether
danger to life. Make sure that the lower an‐ strap
chors are securely engaged and that the
LATCH child restraint fixing system fits se‐ Mounting points
curely against the backrest.◀
The respective symbol shows the an‐
chor for the upper retaining strap.
Seats with an upper top tether are
65
Controls Transporting children safely
marked with this symbol. It can be found on Attaching the upper retaining strap to
the rear seat backrest or the rear window shelf. the anchor
1. Raise the head restraint, if needed.
Safety information 2. Guide the upper retaining strap between
NOTE the supports of the head restraint.
The mounting points for the upper re‐ 3. If there is a retaining strap, run it between
taining straps of child restraint systems are the backrest and the cargo cover.
only provided for these retaining straps. When 4. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to
other objects are mounted, the anchors can be the anchor.
damaged. There is a risk of property damage. 5. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it
Only mount child restraint systems to the up‐ down.
per retaining straps.◀
6. Lower and lock head restraints as needed.
Routing the retaining strap

WARNING
If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly
used for the child restraint system, the protec‐
tive effect can be reduced. There is a risk of in‐
jury. Make sure that the upper retaining strap is
not guided across sharp edges and without
twisting to the upper retaining strap.◀
1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint
3 Hook for upper retaining strap
4 Anchor
5 Seat backrest
6 Upper retaining strap
66
Driving Controls
Driving
Vehicle features and options Pressing the Start/Stop button again switches
drive-ready state back off and radio-ready
This chapter describes all standard, country- state is switched back on.
The drive-ready state cannot be activated as
long as the charging cable is connected, refer
to page 176.
and systems. When using these functions and Radio-ready state
systems, the applicable laws and regulations Some electronic systems/power consumers
must be observed. are ready for operation.
The radio-ready state is switched off automati‐
cally:
Start/Stop button
▷ If the driver's or front passenger door is
opened when exiting the vehicle, with
Overview
drive-ready state switched off manually.
Button in the vehicle ▷ After approx. 8 minutes.
▷ When the vehicle is locked using the cen‐
tral locking system.
▷ If the charge state of the batteries is low.
The radio-ready state remains active if, for in‐
stance drive-ready state is automatically
switched off for the following reasons:
▷ Opening or closing the driver's door.
▷ Unfastening of the driver's safety belt.
1 Start/Stop button ▷ When automatically switching from low

beams to parking lights.
2 Park P
Radio-ready state is also switched back on if
3 Selector lever
the on/off button on the radio is pressed when
the vehicle is parked.
Concept If drive-ready state is switched on: the system
Pressing the Start/Stop button automatically switches to radio-ready state
switches standby state on or off. when the driver's door is opened and the driv‐
er's safety belt is unbuckled if the lights are
Drive-ready state is switched on
switched off or the daytime running lights are
when you depress the brake
switched on.
pedal while pressing the Start/
Stop button.
67
Controls Driving
Standby state The drive-ready state is switched off automati‐

All electronic systems/power consumers are cally if the driver's safety belt is not buckled
ready for operation. Odometer and trip odome‐ when the driver's door is opened.
ter are displayed in the instrument cluster.
Safety information
To preserve the battery, use standby state and
activated power features only as long as abso‐ NOTE
lutely necessary. Selector lever position P is automatically
engaged when drive-ready state is switched
Turning on standby state off. There is a risk of property damage. Do not
Pressing the Start/Stop button switches switch drive-ready state off in vehicle
standby state on or off. washes.◀
Standby state is switched off automatically:
▷ When locking the vehicle, even if the low
beams are activated. Drive-ready state in detail
▷ When opening or closing the driver door, if
Safety information
the driver's safety belt is unbuckled and
the low beams are switched off. WARNING
▷ While the driver's safety belt is unbuckled An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
with driver's door open and low beams off. and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an ac‐
▷ When the batteries' state of charge is low, cident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle
if the low beams are switched off. against rolling.
▷ The low beams switch to parking lights af‐ In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
ter approx. 15 minutes of no use. against rolling away, observe the following:
▷ When the front doors are opened if there is ▷ Set the parking brake.
no other person sitting in the front seats. ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
Drive-ready state curb.
Activated drive-ready state is the equivalent of ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
a running engine in conventional vehicles. De‐ also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel
activated drive-ready state is equivalent to chock.◀
switching the ignition off.
If drive-ready state is switched on, the vehicle Switching on drive-ready state
ready to drive and the READY signal, refer to 1. Close the driver's door.
page 68, is displayed in the instrument clus‐ 2. Depress the brake pedal.
ter.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
All vehicle systems are ready for operation.
Drive-ready state is switched on.
Most of the indicator/warning lights in the in‐
strument cluster light up for a varied length of
time.
To save battery power when parking, switch
off drive-ready state and any unnecessary
electronic systems/power consumers.
68
Driving Controls
Display in the instrument cluster Driving off

The READY display indicates
that the vehicle is ready for driv‐
ing. Driving is possible under the following condi‐
tions:
▷ The high-voltage battery is sufficiently
charged.
Display on the Start/Stop button ▷ The driver's door is closed.
General information State of charge in strong temperature

fluctuations
In the case of strong temperature fluctuations
and a low state of charge of the high-voltage
battery, it may not be possible to start the vehi‐
cle again at the beginning of the next trip. Re‐
charge vehicle with low state of charge in time.
Driving
1. Switch on drive-ready state.
Drive-ready state is also displayed through
2. Apply the brake and engage lever in posi‐
light indicators on the Start/Stop button.
tion D or R.
3. Release the parking brake.
Lighting pulses orange
4. Depress the accelerator pedal to drive.
▷ After unlocking and opening the door.
▷ After switching off drive-ready state. Selector lever positions
When the brake pedal is depressed, the light‐
ing becomes more intense.
Lighting lights up steady blue

After drive-ready state is switched on, light
turns blue. The vehicle is ready to drive. The
READY indicator lights up in the instrument
cluster. In addition, a signal sounds.
Lighting off The engaged selector lever position is dis‐

Drive-ready state, standby state and radio- played on the selector lever.
ready state are turned off. The vehicle is in the
idle state. The charging cable may be con‐
D Drive
nected.
Position for normal vehicle operation.
R Reverse
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
69
Controls Driving
N is Neutral Engage D, N, R
Use in automatic vehicle washes, e.g. The ve‐
hicle may roll.
P Park
Engage only while the vehicle is stationary and
the brake is applied. The drive wheels are
blocked.
Selector lever position P is engaged automati‐
cally in the following situations:
▷ If the driver's safety belt is off, the driver's Turn the selector lever in the desired direction.
door is open and neither brake nor acceler‐ The engaged selector lever position is dis‐
ator pedal are depressed while drive-ready played on the selector lever.
state is switched on and selector lever po‐
sition D or R is set.
Engaging P
▷ After switching off drive-ready state via the
Start/Stop button, if selector lever posi‐
tion D or R is set.
▷ With standby state turned off.
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that se‐
lector lever position P is set. Otherwise, the ve‐
hicle may begin to move. On uphill slopes, also
Set parking brake, refer to page 73.
Engaging selector lever positions Press button P.
General information
▷ Interlock: the selector lever position P can Electronic unlocking of the
be exited only with drive-ready state en‐ transmission lock
gaged.
General information
▷ Shift lock: with the vehicle stationary, press
on the brake pedal before shifting out of P Electronically unlock the transmission lock to
or N; otherwise, the shift command will not maneuver vehicle from a danger area.
be executed. Before unlocking the transmission lock, set the
▷ Shift lock: before shifting out of P, remove parking brake to prevent the vehicle from roll‐
the charging cable from the vehicle; other‐ ing away.
wise, the shift command will not be exe‐
cuted. Engaging selector lever position N
1. Hold the Start/Stop button pressed.
2. Depress the brake pedal.
3. Turn and hold the selector lever in posi‐
tion N.
70
Driving Controls
A corresponding Check Control message conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively
is displayed. intervene in the respective situations.◀
4. Turn the selector lever again into posi‐
WARNING
tion N within approx. 2 seconds.
When driving in electric mode, pedes‐
Position N is indicated on the selector
trians and other traffic might pay less attention
lever.
to the vehicle due to the lack of engine noise.
5. Release Start/Stop button and brake. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driv‐
6. Maneuver the vehicle from the danger area ing style to the traffic conditions. Watch traffic
and secure it against moving on its own. closely and actively intervene in the respective
situations.◀
Switching off drive-ready state
WARNING
Park the vehicle. Noises from the electrical
system such as for cooling the high-voltage Without energy recovery, there is no
system might still be audible. braking power of the electric motor available.
The vehicle could roll further than anticipated.
After stopping the vehicle: There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driv‐
1. Apply brake and engage lever in position ing style to the traffic conditions. Watch traffic
P P. closely and actively intervene in the respective
situations.◀
2. Set the parking brake.
Accelerator pedal positions
The READY indicator goes out and a signal
sounds.
In case of longer idle times, follow the in‐
structions in the Care chapter, refer to
page 224.
Before driving into a vehicle wash

So that the vehicle can roll into a vehicle wash,
observe instructions for going into an auto‐
matic vehicle wash, refer to page 220.
1 Deceleration
2 Coasting
Driving in detail: eDRIVE 3 Acceleration or constant speed: ePOWER
Safety information Deceleration

DANGER The deceleration depends on the position of
The braking power of the electric motor the accelerator pedal. The less the actuation of
can be stronger than for a vehicle with com‐ the accelerator pedal, the greater the decelera‐
bustion engine. Abrupt braking and slow-down tion. In this way energy is recovered and the
may confuse other traffic. There is a risk of an high-voltage battery is charged.
accident. Carefully release the accelerator Releasing the accelerator pedal causes decel‐
pedal. Adjust the driving style to the traffic eration similar to cautious braking. Addition‐
71
Controls Driving
ally, the brake lights will come on without hit‐ Coasting

ting the brakes. The electric drive makes it possible to roll with‐
out consuming energy. This driving condition
Energy recovery: CHARGE is referred to as coasting.
The high-voltage battery is recharged in part Proactive driving reduces energy consumption
through energy recovery. The electric motor and increases the range.
acts as a generator when decelerating and
With vehicle rolling, no energy is recovered.
converts the kinetic energy into electrical en‐
ergy.
Exemplary traffic situations
Energy can be recovered if the following condi‐
If a route can be traveled without anticipated
tions are met:
need for braking, it is advantageous to roll.
▷ The vehicle is moving.
The following exemplary driving situations may
▷ Speed higher than approx. be suitable:
12 mph/20 km/h.
▷ Rolling on a straight downhill route without
▷ Selector lever position D or R is set. obstacles.
▷ Accelerator pedal is not actuated or only ▷ Coasting on a route without obstacles.
pressed down 1/3 of the way.
Avoid late or abrupt braking.
Energy cannot be recovered in the following
situations: Acoustic pedestrian protection
▷ Selector lever position N is set.
▷ While drive stability control systems, for in‐ Concept
stance DTC, are active and controlling the Depending on the country-specific version, the
vehicle, even though this is not indicated system generates a continuous driving noise
by an indicator light. during electric driving up to approx.
▷ The high-voltage battery is fully charged. 20 mph/30 km/h.
▷ When temperature of the high-voltage bat‐ A speaker system broadcasts the noise to the
tery is very low or very high. surroundings.
In winter it might be possible that the en‐ As a result, other traffic participants, e.g., pe‐
ergy recovery is temporarily unavailable af‐ destrians or cyclists, can better perceive the
ter startup. vehicle.
Exemplary traffic situations Range Extender

If a deceleration operation is foreseeable while
Increasing the range
driving, this can be used for energy recovery.
If the charging state of the high-voltage battery
The following exemplary driving situations may
drops during travel to a minimum value, the
be suitable:
Range Extender starts and supplies the re‐
▷ Decelerating downhill. quired electrical energy for driving on.
▷ Deceleration before a red light. The symbol on the charging state indicator
Avoid late or abrupt braking. Instead, deceler‐ designates a Range Extender activation time.
ate the vehicle using energy recovery. The Range Extender controls its output auto‐
matically, turns itself off and restarts according
to the driving situation.
72
Driving Controls
If Range Extender is activated, the current Heavily discharged high-voltage

charging state of the high-voltage battery is battery
maintained. If necessary, the Range Extender If the high-voltage battery is heavily dis‐
charges the high-voltage battery until the charged during the trip, the performance and
charge state at the time of the activation of the some comfort features are reduced step-by-
Range Extender has been reached. step to extend the range.
The Range Extender has no direct connection
to the drive train. Heated high-voltage battery
Using the Range Extender With a stationary vehicle

Purely electric use of the vehicle offers the full In exceptional cases, it is possible that the
performance capability of the drive and the high-voltage battery heats up sharply when the
most efficient use of the vehicle. vehicle is stationary. E.g., with extreme exter‐
Range Extender is designed to enable further nal temperatures and direct solar radiation.
driving in situations, in which the purely elec‐ Drive-ready state cannot be switched on if the
tric range is not sufficient. E.g., the next charg‐ high-voltage battery is overheated.
ing station can be reached. A Check Control message is displayed.
With a very low charge state of the high-volt‐ Another message will indicate when drive-
age battery, the drive power is reduced on ready state is available again.
sharp uphill grades or at high speeds in order
to allow further driving. While driving
This avoids a complete discharge of the high- If the high-voltage battery overheats during the
voltage battery. trip, the performance is reduced step-by-step
A Check Control message indicates an up‐ in order to cool down the battery. The ePO‐
coming reduction in drive power. The power WER performance display in the instrument
reduction is displayed in the performance dis‐ cluster decreases. If the temperature increases
play, refer to page 83. further, park the vehicle until the high-voltage
battery has cooled down. If the performance
Automatic maintenance run display falls to 0, the drive-ready state is
switched off and the vehicle comes to a stop.
Avoid having long periods when the Range Ex‐
tender is not used. To ensure functional relia‐
bility, the Range Extender is automatically acti‐
vated at certain intervals for a few minutes Parking brake
while driving. Respective Check Control mes‐
sages indicate the maintenance run. It the Concept
maintenance run of the Range Extender is oc‐ The parking brake is used to prevent the vehi‐
curring at an unfavorable time, it can be can‐ cle from rolling when it is parked.
celed by pressing the Start/Stop button. It
postpones the maintenance run. Safety information
Should the high-voltage battery be fully WARNING
charged or if there is not enough gas in the An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
tank then a maintenance run will not be exe‐ and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an ac‐
cuted. cident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle
against rolling.
73
Controls Driving
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured Setting

against rolling away, observe the following:
▷ Set the parking brake. With a stationary vehicle
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, Pull the switch.
turn the front wheels in the direction of the The LED lights up.
curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, The indicator light lights up red. The
also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel parking brake is set.
chock.◀
WARNING While driving
Unattended children or animals can To use as emergency brake while driving:
cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐ Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle brakes
selves and traffic, e.g., due to the following ac‐ hard while the switch is being pulled.
tions:
The indicator light lights up red, a sig‐
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button. nal sounds and the brake lights light
▷ Releasing the parking brake. up.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐ A Check Control message is displayed.
dows.
If the vehicle is slowed down to a speed of ap‐
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
prox. 2 mph/3 km/h the parking brake is set.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not Releasing
hicle. Take the remote control with you when Releasing manually
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀ 1. Switch on drive-ready state.
Overview 2. Press the switch while stepping on

the brake pedal or selector lever position P
is set.
The LED and indicator light go out.
The parking brake is released.
Automatic release
For automatic release, step on the accelerator
pedal.
The LED and indicator lamp go out.
Parking brake
The parking brake is automatically released
when you step on the accelerator pedal under
the following conditions:
▷ Drive-ready state switched on.
▷ Drive mode engaged.
▷ Driver buckled in and doors closed.
74
Driving Controls
Malfunction Turn signal, high beams,

In the event of a failure or malfunction of the headlight flasher
parking brake, secure the vehicle against roll‐
ing using a wheel chock, e.g., when leaving it. Turn signal
After a power failure Turn signal in exterior mirror

When driving and during operation of the turn
Putting the parking brake into signals or hazard warning system, do not fold
operation in the exterior mirrors, so that the signal lights
1. Switch on standby state. on the exterior mirror are easy to see.
2. Press the switch while stepping on Using turn signals

the brake pedal or selector lever position P
is set.
It may take several seconds for the brake to be
put into operation. Any sounds associated with
this are normal.
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster goes out as soon as the parking
brake is ready for operation.
Press the lever past the resistance point.

Hold function The lever returns into its starting position after
actuation. To switch off manually, slightly tap
Concept the lever to the resistance point.
The system holds the vehicle automatically
when gear is engaged. This prevents rolling Triple turn signal activation
against the direction of travel. Lightly tap the lever up or down.
In selector lever position D, the vehicle cannot The turn signal flashes three times.
roll backwards. In selector lever position R, it
cannot roll forward. The brake pedal does not The function can be activated or deactivated.
have to be pressed. Using iDrive:
1. "Settings"
Reducing energy consumption
2. "Lighting"
To reduce energy consumption when the hold
function is activated, activate the parking brake 3. "Triple turn signal"
or engage lever in position P when the vehicle The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
is stopped for long periods of time. rently used.
The hold function can be affected by the vehi‐
cle's load and the road incline. If needed, a Signaling briefly
Check Control message will appear and posi‐ Press the lever to the resistance point and hold
tion P will be selected automatically. it there for as long as you want the turn signal
to flash.
75
Controls Driving
Malfunction Switching on
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp
indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.
High beams, headlight flasher

Push the lever forward or pull it backward.
Tap up the lever or press it past the resistance

point.
▷ Normal wiper speed: tap up once.
The wipers switch to intermittent operation
when the vehicle is stationary.
▷ High beams on, arrow 1. ▷ Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or tap once
▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2. beyond the resistance point.
Wipers change to normal speed when ve‐
hicle comes to standstill.
Washer/wiper system The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
sition when released.
General information
Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry, Switching off and brief wipe
as this may damage the wiper blades or cause
them to become worn more quickly.
Safety information
WARNING
If the wipers start moving in the folded
away state, body parts can be jammed or dam‐
age may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is
a risk of injury or risk of property damage.
Make sure that the vehicle is switched off Press the lever down.
when the wipers are in the folded away state ▷ To switch off from fast wiper speed: press
and the wipers are folded in when switching down twice.
on.◀ ▷ To switch off from normal wiper speed:
press down once.
NOTE
▷ Brief wipe: press down once.
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
motor can overheat when switching on. There sition when released.
is a risk of damage to property. Defrost the
windshield prior to switching the wipers on.◀
76
Driving Controls
Interval mode or rain sensor Setting the frequency or sensitivity of

the rain sensor
Concept
The rain sensor automatically controls the time
between wipes depending on the intensity of
the rainfall.
General information
The sensor is located on the windshield, di‐
rectly in front of the interior mirror. Without the
rain sensor, the frequency of the wiper opera‐
tion is preset. Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the frequency
or sensitivity of the rain sensor.
Safety information
Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the rain
NOTE sensor.
If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the rain
can accidentally start moving in vehicle sensor.
washes. There is a risk of property damage.
Deactivate the rain sensor in vehicle washes.◀
Windshield washer system
Activating/deactivating Safety information
WARNING
The washer fluid can freeze onto the win‐
dow at low temperatures and obstruct the
view. There is a risk of an accident. Only use
the washer systems, if the washer fluid cannot
freeze. Use antifreeze, if needed.◀
NOTE
When the washer fluid reservoir is empty,
Press the button on the wiper lever. the wash pump cannot work as intended.
Wiping is started. There is a risk of property damage. Do not use
If the vehicle is equipped with a rain sensor: the washer system when the washer fluid res‐
the LED in the wiper lever is illuminated. ervoir is empty.◀
If wipers are frozen to windshield, wiper opera‐

tion is deactivated.
During trip interruption with the rain sensor
switched on: if the trip is resumed within ap‐
prox. 15 minutes, the rain sensor is automati‐
cally activated again.
77
Controls Driving
Cleaning the windshield ▷ In resting position: turn the switch down‐

ward, arrow 3. The switch automatically re‐
turns to its resting position when released.
▷ In intermittent mode: turn the switch fur‐
ther, arrow 2. The switch automatically re‐
turns to its intermittent position when re‐
leased.
Fold-away position of the wipers
Concept
Pull the lever.
The wipers can be folded away from the wind‐
The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐
shield in the fold-away position.
shield and activates the wipers briefly.
General information
Windshield washer nozzles Important, e.g., when changing the wiper
The windshield washer nozzles are automati‐ blades or when folding out under frosty condi‐
cally heated while standby state is switched tions.
on.
Safety information
Rear window wiper WARNING
Overview If the wipers start moving in the folded

away state, body parts can be jammed or dam‐
age may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is
a risk of injury or risk of property damage.
Make sure that the vehicle is switched off
when the wipers are in the folded away state
and the wipers are folded in when switching
on.◀
NOTE
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper
Switching on the rear window wiper motor can overheat when switching on. There
Turn the outer switch upward. is a risk of damage to property. Defrost the
windshield prior to switching the wipers on.◀
▷ Resting position of the wiper, position 0.
▷ Intermittent mode,arrow. 1. When reverse
gear is engaged, the system switches to Folding away the wipers
continuous operation. 1. Switch standby state on and off again.
2. With frosty conditions, make sure that the
Clean the rear window blades are not frozen to the windshield
Turn the outer switch in the desired direction. 3. Press the wiper lever up beyond the point
of resistance and hold it for approx. 3 sec‐
78
Driving Controls
onds, until the wipers remain in a nearly away from ignition sources. Do not refill oper‐
vertical position ating materials into different bottles. Store op‐
4. Fold the wipers all the way away from the erating materials out of reach of children.
windshield. United States: the washer fluid mixture ratio is
regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual
states; do not exceed the allowable washer
fluid dilution ratio limits that apply. Follow the
usage instructions on the washer fluid con‐
tainer.
Use of BMW’s Windshield Washer Concen‐
trate or the equivalent is recommended.◀
NOTE
Silicon-containing additives in the
Folding down the wipers washer fluid for the water-repelling effect on
the windows can lead to damage to the wash‐
After the wipers are folded back down, the
ing system. There is a risk of property damage.
wiper system must be reactivated.
Do not add silicon-containing additives to the
1. Fold the wipers back down onto the wind‐ washer fluid.◀
shield.
NOTE
2. Switch on standby state.
Mixing different windshield washer con‐
3. Push wiper lever down. Wipers return to centrates or antifreeze can damage the wash‐
their resting position and are ready again ing system. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
for operation. erty. Do not mix different windshield washer
concentrates or antifreeze. Observe the infor‐
mation and mixing ratios provided on the con‐
Washer fluid tainers.◀
General information
Overview
All washer nozzles are supplied from one res‐
ervoir.
Use a mixture of tap water and windshield
washer concentrate. If desired, a windshield
washer concentrate containing antifreeze can
be used.
Recommended minimum fill quantity:
0.2 US gal/1 liter.
Safety information
The washer fluid reservoir is located under the
WARNING hood.
Some antifreeze agents can contain
harmful substances and are flammable. There
is a risk of fire and a risk of injury. Observe the
instructions on the containers. Keep antifreeze
79
Controls Driving
Malfunction
The use of undiluted windshield washer con‐
centrate or alcohol-based antifreeze can lead
to incorrect readings at temperatures below
+5 ℉/-15 ℃.
80
Displays Controls
Displays
Instrument cluster
Concept
The instrument cluster is a variable display. may differ from the way they are shown in this
Some of the displays in the instrument cluster Owner's Manual.
Overview
1 Onboard Computer 93 7 Driving Dynamics Control program 117

2 Driver assistance systems 8 Range for electric driving 89
3 Speedometer 9 Battery charge indicator 83
4 Drive-ready state indicator 68 10 Performance display 83
5 ECO PRO tips 169 Selection list, such as for the radio 92.
6 Trip odometer 89 11 Range Extender range 89
81
Controls Displays
12 Range Extender fuel gauge 88 14 Display, drive mode 69

13 Messages, for instance Check Control
Charging screen
1 Charging status 181 5 Range for electric driving 181

2 End of charging time 181 6 Charging state 83
Departure time with timer 182 7 Range Extender range 89
3 Maximum electrical range 181 8 With Range Extender: fuel gauge 88
4 Stationary climate control 182
Displaying the eDRIVE ▷ Electric driving: ePOWER.

system ▷ Energy recovery: CHARGE.
▷ Drive-ready state: READY.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Concept
The display depends on the system's operat‐
ing condition. The following functions of the
eDRIVE system are shown in the instrument
cluster
▷ High-voltage battery charge indicator.
82
Displays Controls
High-voltage battery charge indicator ▷ Gray arrow: Range Extender deactivated.

▷ White arrow: Range Extender activated.
Performance display
WARNING
Even when it is indicated that the high-
voltage battery is discharged, the high-voltage
system is always still under high voltage. There The accelerator pedal indicator in the perform‐
is a risk of fire or a risk of injury. Do not touch ance display indicates the current efficiency of
or change live parts, e.g., orange high-voltage the driving style. The efficient range of the per‐
cables, even when the batteries are dis‐ formance display is colored blue.
charged.◀
Accelerator pedal indicator in the CHARGE
The fill level bars indicate the available charg‐ range, arrow 1: display for energy recovered by
ing state of the high-voltage battery when coasting or when decelerating.
standby state and standby state are switched Accelerator pedal indicator in the ePOWER
on. range, arrow 2: display when accelerating.
With a low range the color of the charging sta‐ The blue ePOWER range in the display is re‐
tus indicator switches from blue to yellow. duced if the high-voltage battery is heavily dis‐
In addition, the range for electric driving is dis‐ charged. The available power is automatically
played. adjusted.
Use eDRIVE efficiently, refer to page 162.
With Range Extender: maintaining
charging state Drive-ready state: READY
The READY display indicates
that the vehicle is ready for driv‐
ing. Drive-ready state in detail,
refer to page 68.
Indications on the Control Display
Fuel consumption history

The arrow on the charging state indicator
designates the Range Extender activation Displaying fuel consumption history
time. If Range Extender is activated, the cur‐ Using iDrive:
rent charging state of the high-voltage battery
is maintained. 1. "Vehicle info"
83
Controls Displays
2. "eDRIVE" ▷ Blue: electrical energy.

3. "CHARGE" ▷ Arrow: direction of the energy flow.
▷ Segments of the high-voltage battery sym‐
Display bolize the charging state.
▷ The operating states are displayed:
"ePOWER", "CHARGE".
▷ Interior cooling/heating function switched
on.
Energy distribution
General information
Beside the current range, the display shows
The upper bars indicate the average energy the energy distribution and the potential range
consumed during the driving time, arrow 1. if individual secondary functions are switched
The lower bars indicate the average energy re‐ off.
covered during the driving time, arrow 2.
▷ Blue: electrical energy.
One bar indicates one minute.
▷ White: activated secondary functions.
The eDRIVE system's average fuel consump‐
tion is indicated by a line above the bar display Displaying energy distribution
and as a value on the right next to the graph.
Using iDrive:
Energy flow of the eDRIVE system 1. "Vehicle info"
2. "eDRIVE"
Displaying the energy flow
3. "Comfort information"
Using iDrive:
1. "Vehicle info"
2. "eDRIVE" Check Control
3. "Energy flow"
Concept
Display The Check Control system monitors functions
in the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions
in the monitored systems.
General information
A Check Control message is displayed as a
combination of indicator or warning lights and
SMS text messages in the instrument cluster.
In addition, an acoustic signal may sound and
an SMS text message may appear on the Con‐
trol Display.
The display shows the active components of
the eDRIVE system:
84
Displays Controls
Indicator/warning lights Braking system impaired. Continue to

drive moderately.
General information Have the vehicle checked immediately
The indicator and warning lights in the instru‐ by a dealer’s service center or another quali‐
ment cluster can light up in a variety of combi‐ fied service center or repair shop.
nations and colors.
Several lights indicate function checks and Approach control warning
light up only temporarily when drive-ready
state or standby state are activated. Indicator light illuminates: advance
warning is issued, for example when
there is the impending danger of a col‐
Red lights
lision or the distance to the vehicle ahead is
Safety belt reminder too small.
Increase distance.
Safety belt on the driver's side is not
buckled. For some country-specific Indicator light flashes: acute warning of the im‐
models: passenger belt is not worn or minent danger of a collision when the vehicle
objects are detected on the front passenger approaches another vehicle at a relatively high
seat. differential speed.
Indicator lamp flashes or is illuminated: safety Intervention by braking or make an evasive ma‐
belt on the driver or passenger side is not neuver.
buckled. The safety belt reminder can also be
activated if objects are placed on the front pas‐ Person warning
senger seat.
If a collision with a person detected in
Make sure that the safety belts are positioned this way is imminent, the symbol lights
correctly. up and a signal sounds.
Airbag system
Orange lights
Airbag system and belt tensioner are
not working. Active Cruise Control
Have the vehicle checked immediately The number bars shows the selected
by a dealer’s service center or another quali‐ distance from the vehicle driving
fied service center or repair shop. ahead.
Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function,
Parking brake ACC, refer to page 119.
The parking brake is set.

Release the parking brake, refer to Vehicle detection, Active Cruise Control
page 74. Indicator light illuminates: a vehicle has
been detected ahead of you.
Brake system Indicator light flashes: the conditions
are not adequate for the system to work.
The system was deactivated but applies the
brakes until you actively resume control by
85
Controls Displays
pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid
pedal. sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 107.
Yellow lights
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
Anti-lock Braking System ABS
The indicator light illuminates.
Braking force boost may not be work‐
The Tire Pressure Monitor reports a
ing. Avoid abrupt braking. Take the lon‐
low tire inflation pressure or a flat tire.
ger braking distance into account.
Observe the information in the Check Control
Have the system immediately checked
message.
by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop. The indicator light flashes and then illuminates
continuously.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control No flat tire or loss of tire inflation pressure can
be detected.
The indicator light flashes: DSC con‐
▷ Interference caused by systems or devices
trols the drive and braking forces. The
with the same radio frequency: after leav‐
vehicle is stabilized. Reduce speed and
ing the area of the interference, the system
adapt driving style to the driving circumstan‐
automatically becomes active again.
ces.
▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset.
The indicator light lights up: DSC has malfunc‐
Reset the system again.
tioned.
▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is
Have the system checked by a dealer’s service
mounted: have it checked by a dealer’s
center or another qualified service center or re‐
service center or another qualified service
pair shop.
center or repair shop as needed.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control, refer to
▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by a
page 116.
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 104.
deactivated or DTC Dynamic Traction
Control is activated
Steering system
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deac‐
tivated or DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐ Steering system in some cases not
trol is activated. working.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control, refer to Have the steering system checked by a
page 116, and DTC Dynamic Traction Control, dealer’s service center or another qualified
refer to page 117. service center or repair shop.
Flat Tire Monitor FTM Emissions
The Flat Tire Monitor signals a loss of ▷ The warning light lights up:
tire inflation pressure in a tire.
86
Displays Controls
Emissions are deteriorating. Have Cruise control

the vehicle checked as soon as
The system is switched on. It maintains
possible.
the speed that was set using the con‐
▷ The warning light flashes under certain cir‐ trol elements on the steering wheel.
cumstances:
This indicates that there is excessive mis‐
Blue lights
firing in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the High beams
system checked immediately; otherwise,
High beams are switched on.
serious engine misfiring within a brief pe‐
riod can seriously damage emission con‐ High beams, refer to page 76.
trol components, in particular the catalytic
converter. Hiding Check Control messages
Socket for Onboard Diagnosis, refer to
page 208.
Acoustic pedestrian protection inactive

Acoustic pedestrian protection deacti‐
vated or possibly not working.
Have the system checked by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
ter or repair shop.
Press and hold button on signal lever.
Green lights
Continuous display
Turn signal Some Check Control messages are displayed
continuously and are not cleared until the mal‐
Turn signal switched on.
function is eliminated. If several malfunctions
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator occur at once, the messages are displayed
light indicates that a turn signal bulb consecutively.
has failed.
These messages can be hidden for approx.
Turn signal, refer to page 75. 8 seconds. After this time, they are displayed
again automatically.
Parking lights, headlight
Temporary display
Parking lights or headlights are
Other Check Control messages are hidden au‐
switched on.
tomatically after approx. 20 seconds. These
Parking lights/low beams, headlight Check Control messages are stored and can
control, refer to page 97. be displayed again later.
87
Controls Displays
Displaying stored Check Control Messages after trip completion

messages Special messages displayed while driving are
Using iDrive: displayed again after standby state is switched
off.
1. "Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Check Control" With Range Extender: fuel
4. Select the SMS text message. gauge
Display
Check Control
At least one Check Control message is
displayed or is stored.
SMS text messages

SMS text messages in combination with a
The fill level bars indicate the available fuel
symbol in the instrument cluster explain a
supply of the Range Extender when drive-
Check Control message and the meaning of
ready state and standby state are switched on.
the indicator/warning lights.
Additional range of the Range Extender on top
Supplementary SMS text messages of pure electric range. If the Range Extender is
Additional information, such as on the cause of activated, the color of the fill level bar indicator
an error or the required action, can be called up switches from gray to white.
via Check Control. Vehicle tilt position may cause the display to
With urgent messages the added text will be vary.
automatically displayed on the Control Display. Information on refueling, refer to page 184.
Further help
Depending on the Check Control message, Coolant temperature
further help can be selected.
If the coolant along with the engine becomes
▷ "Owner's Manual"
too hot, a Check Control message is displayed.
Display additional information about the
A red indicator light is displayed.
Check Control message in the Integrated
Owner's Manual.
▷ "Service request" Check the coolant level, refer to page 205.
Contact a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair
shop.
▷ "Roadside Assistance"
Contact Roadside Assistance.
88
Displays Controls
Odometer and trip odometer If the indicator drops to +37 ℉/+3 ℃ or lower, a
signal sounds.
Display A Check Control message is displayed.
There is an increased risk of ice on roads.
Time
The time is displayed in the Onboard Com‐
puter.
The time can be set on the Control Display.
▷ Odometer, arrow 1, Scope of the onboard

computer, refer to page 93.
Range
▷ Trip odometer, arrow 2. General information
The expected range for the energy stored in
Show/reset miles: TRIP the high-voltage battery is displayed on the
right side of the instrument cluster next to the
charge state indicator of the high-voltage bat‐
tery.
Always make sure that the range is sufficient
for the planned trip. The range is dynamic and
can abruptly change.
The range can be abruptly reduced or in‐
creased based on the following factors:
▷ Driving style.
Press the button. ▷ Traffic conditions.
▷ With standby state turned off, the time, the ▷ Program change via Driving Dynamics
external temperature and the odometer are Control.
displayed.
▷ Climate and terrain conditions.
▷ When standby state is switched on, the trip
odometer is reset. ▷ Automatic climate control settings.
▷ After determination of a route by the navi‐
gation system.
▷ When exiting a route or recalculating a
External temperature
route.
WARNING Increasing the range, refer to page 162.
Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃ Check Control messages indicate a limited
there can be a risk of icy roads, e.g., on bridges range.
or shady sections of road. There is a risk of an
accident. Adjust your driving style to the
weather conditions at low temperatures.◀
89
Controls Displays
Heavily discharged high-voltage Display

battery
The high-voltage battery is
Detailed information on service
heavily discharged. Its power
requirements
output will be reduced. Heating More information on the scope of service re‐
and climate control functions quired can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
will be deactivated. In this state, play.
the exact range can no longer be calculated. A Using iDrive:
short range may still be available depending on
the environmental conditions. 1. "Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
State of charge in strong temperature 3. "Service required"

fluctuations Required maintenance procedures and le‐
In the case of strong temperature fluctuations gally mandated inspections are displayed.
and a low state of charge of the high-voltage 4. Select an entry to call up detailed informa‐
battery, it may not be possible to start the vehi‐ tion.
cle again at the beginning of the next trip. Re‐
charge vehicle with low state of charge in time. Symbols
With Range Extender Symbols Description

The range of the Range Extender is displayed No service is currently re‐
separately next to the fuel gauge. The total quired.
range can be displayed via the Onboard Com‐
puter. Expanding the range with Range Ex‐ The deadline for scheduled
tender, refer to page 72. maintenance or a legally man‐
dated inspection is approach‐
ing.
Service requirements
The service deadline has al‐
Concept ready passed.
The function displays the service requirements
and the corresponding maintenance scopes.
Entering appointment dates
General information Enter the dates for the mandatory vehicle in‐
spections.
The driving distance or the time to the next
scheduled maintenance is displayed briefly in Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are
the instrument cluster after standby state is set correctly.
switched on. Using iDrive:
A service advisor can read out the current 1. "Vehicle info"
service requirements from your remote con‐
2. "Vehicle status"
trol.
3. "Service required"
4. "§ Vehicle inspection"
90
Displays Controls
5. "Date:" Safety information

6. Adjust the settings. WARNING
7. Confirm. The system does not release from the
The entered date is stored. personal responsibility to correctly assess visi‐
bility and traffic situation. There is a risk of an
Automatic Service Request accident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic
Data regarding the service status or legally conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively
mandated vehicle inspections is automatically intervene in the respective situations.◀
transmitted to your dealer’s service center be‐
fore a service due date. Overview
You can check when your dealer’s service cen‐
ter was notified. Camera
Using iDrive:
1. "Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Last Service Request"
Speed Limit Info

The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
Speed Limit Info Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐
ror clean and clear.
Concept
Speed Limit Info shows the current maximum Switching on/off
permitted speed in the instrument cluster.
Using iDrive:
General information 1. "Settings"

The camera in the area of the interior mirror 2. "Instrument cluster"
detects traffic signs at the edge of the road as 3. "Speed limit information"
well as variable overhead sign posts. Traffic
If Speed Limit Info is switched on, it can be dis‐
signs with extra symbols for wet road condi‐
played on the Info Display in the instrument
tions, etc., are also detected and compared
cluster.
with the vehicle's onboard data, such as from
the rain sensor, and will be displayed depend‐
Display
ing on the situation. The system takes into ac‐
count the information stored in the navigation The following is displayed in the instrument
system and also displays speed limits present cluster:
on routes without signs.
91
Controls Displays
Speed Limit Info Selection lists

Current speed limit.
General information
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the
following can be displayed or operated using
the buttons and the thumbwheel on the steer‐
Speed Limit Info not available. ing wheel and the display in the instrument
cluster:
▷ Current audio source.
▷ Redial phone feature.
▷ Turn on voice activation system.
System limits It also displays programs of the Driving Dy‐

namics Control.
The system may not be fully functional and
may provide incorrect information in the fol‐
Activating a list and adjusting the
lowing situations:
setting
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ When signs are fully or partially concealed
by objects, stickers or paint.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
▷ When driving toward bright lights or strong
reflections.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered by a
sticker, etc. On the right side of the steering wheel, turn
▷ In the event of incorrect detection by the the thumbwheel to activate the corresponding
camera. list.
▷ If the speed limits stored in the navigation 1. Turn the thumbwheel and select the de‐
system are incorrect. sired setting.
▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐ 2. Press the thumbwheel.
tem.
▷ When roads differ from the navigation,
such as due to changes in road routing.
▷ When passing buses or trucks with a
speed sticker.
▷ If the traffic signs are non-conforming.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
▷ When signs that are valid for a parallel road
are detected.
92
Displays Controls
Display ▷ With Range Extender: total range.

▷ Average fuel consumption.
▷ Current fuel consumption.
▷ Average speed.
▷ External temperature.
▷ Time.
▷ Speed Limit Info.
▷ Charge state of the high-voltage battery as
a percentage.
Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
the list in the instrument cluster can differ from Selecting information
the illustration shown. You can select what information from the On‐
board Computer can be displayed in the in‐
strument cluster.
Onboard Computer Using iDrive:
1. "Settings"
Concept
2. "Instrument cluster"
The Onboard Computer displays different ve‐
hicle data in the instrument cluster, such as 3. Select the desired information.
average values. Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Calling up information on the Info
Display Display in the instrument cluster
The information from the onboard computer is
shown in the upper left area of the instrument
cluster.
Information in detail
With Range Extender: total range

The total range considers the
capacity of the fuel tank as well
Press and hold button on signal lever. as the electric energy in the
Information is displayed in the Info Display of high-voltage battery.
the instrument cluster.
Average fuel consumption

Information at a glance
The average fuel consumption is calculated on
Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn the basis of various distances. Standstill with
signal lever calls up the following information in drive-ready state turned off is not considered.
the Info Display:
▷ Miles.
93
Controls Displays
Current fuel consumption ▷ "Onboard info": average values, such as

Displays the current energy consumption. The the fuel consumption, are displayed. The
efficiency of the driving can be monitored. values can be reset individually.
▷ "Trip computer": the values deliver an
Average speed overview of a certain distance and can be
Periods when vehicle is parked with drive- reset as often as necessary.
ready state switched off are not included when
calculating average speed. Calling up the Onboard Computer or
trip computer
Resetting average values Using iDrive:
1. "Vehicle info"
2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"
Resetting the Onboard Computer

Using iDrive:
1. "Vehicle info"
2. "Onboard info"
3. "Consumpt." or "Speed"
Press and hold button on turn signal lever.
4. "Yes"
Speed Limit Info Resetting the trip computer

Further information, see chapter Speed Limit Using iDrive:
Info.
1. "Vehicle info"
Display of charge state of the high- 2. "Trip computer"
voltage battery as a percentage 3. "Reset": all values are reset.
The current battery charging state of the high- "Automatically reset": all values are reset
voltage battery can be displayed as %-value. approx. 4 hours after the vehicle has come
to a standstill.
Onboard Computer on the Control
Display
Speed warning
Concept
The Onboard Computer displays different ve‐ Concept
hicle data on the Control Display, such as aver‐
A speed limit can be set that when reached will
age values.
cause a warning to be issued.
General information General information

The vehicle features two types of Onboard
The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed
Computers.
drops below the set speed limit once by at
least 3 mph/5 km/h.
94
Displays Controls
Displaying, setting or changing the 6. Turn the controller until the desired mi‐
speed warning nutes are displayed.
Using iDrive: 7. Press the controller.
1. "Settings" The time is stored.
2. "Speed"
Setting the time format
3. "Warning at:"
1. "Settings"
4. Turn the Controller until the desired speed
2. "Time/Date"
is displayed.
3. "Format:"
5. Press the Controller.
4. Select the desired format.
Activating/deactivating the speed The time format is stored.
warning
Using iDrive: Automatic time setting
Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
1. "Settings"
the time, date and, if needed, the time zone are
2. "Speed" updated automatically.
3. "Warning"
1. "Settings"
4. Press the Controller.
2. "Time/Date"
Setting your current speed as the 3. "Auto time set"

speed warning
Date
Using iDrive:
1. "Settings" Setting the date
2. "Speed" 1. "Settings"
3. "Select current speed" 2. "Time/Date"
4. Press the Controller. 3. "Date:"
4. Turn the Controller until the desired day is
displayed.
Settings on the Control 5. Press the Controller.
Display 6. Make the settings for the month and year.
The date is stored.
Time
Setting the time Setting the date format

1. "Settings" 1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date" 2. "Time/Date"
3. "Time:" 3. "Format:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired hours 4. Select the desired format.
are displayed. The date format is stored.
95
Controls Displays
Language Activating/deactivating the display of

the current vehicle position
Setting the language
1. "Settings" Concept
2. "Language/Units" If vehicle location has been activated, the cur‐
rent vehicle position can be displayed in the
3. "Language:"
BMW i ConnectedDrive app or in the Connec‐
4. Select the desired language. tedDrive customer portal.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used. Activating/deactivating
Using iDrive:
Setting the voice dialog
1. "Settings"
Voice dialog for the voice activation system,
refer to page 27. 2. "GPS tracking"
3. "GPS tracking"
Units of measurement
Setting the units of measurement

To set the units for fuel consumption, route/
distance and temperature:
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. Select the desired menu item.
4. Select the desired unit.
used.
Brightness
Setting the brightness

To set the brightness of the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Control display"
3. "Brightness"
4. Turn the controller until the desired bright‐
ness is set.
used.
Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐
ness settings may not be clearly visible.
96
Lights Controls
Lights
Vehicle features and options Symbol Function
This chapter describes all standard, country- Low beams
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due Instrument lighting
must be observed. Parking lights, cornering
lights and roadside parking
lights
Overview
General information
Switches in the vehicle
Position of switch: , ,
If the driver's door is opened when standby
state is switched off, the exterior lighting is au‐
tomatically switched off.
Parking lights
Position of switch:
The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.
Do not use the parking lights for extended pe‐
The light switch element is located next to the riods; otherwise, they might drain the battery
steering wheel. and it would then be impossible to switch on
drive-ready state.
Symbol Function When parking, switch on the one-sided road‐
side parking light, refer to page 97.
Automatic headlight control
Low beams
Lights off Position of switch:
Daytime running lights The low beams illuminate when standby state
is switched on.
Parking lights
Roadside parking light
Concept
The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.
97
Controls Lights
Switching on Headlamp courtesy delay feature
General information
The low beams stay lit for a short while if the
headlight flasher is switched on after the radio-
ready state is switched off.
Setting the duration

Using iDrive:
1. "Settings"
With standby state switched off, press the
2. "Lighting"
lever either up or down past the resistance
point for approx. 2 seconds. 3. "Pathway lighting:"
4. Set length of time.
Switching off The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
Briefly press the lever to the resistance point in rently used.
the opposite direction.
Automatic headlight control

Welcome lights and
Concept
headlamp courtesy delay
The low beams are switched on and off auto‐
feature matically depending on the ambient bright‐
ness, for instance in tunnels, in twilight or if
Welcome lights there is precipitation.
General information
General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment and the
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
ambient brightness, individual light functions
cause the lights to be switched on.
may be switched on briefly when the vehicle is
unlocked. When emerging from a tunnel during the day,
the low beams are not switched off immedi‐
Activating/deactivating ately but instead only after approx. 2 minutes.
Position of switch: ,
Activating
Using iDrive:
Position of switch:
1. "Settings" The indicator light in the instrument cluster is
2. "Lighting" illuminated when the low beams are switched
3. "Welcome lights" on.

System limits
used.
The automatic headlight control cannot serve
as a substitute for your personal judgment of
lighting conditions.
98
Lights Controls
For example, the sensors are unable to detect Settings

fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks un‐
Adjust the brightness with the
der these conditions, you should always switch
thumbwheel.
on the lights manually.
Daytime running lights

General information Interior lights
Position of switch: , ,
The daytime running lights light up when General information
standby state is switched on. After standby Depending on the equipment, the interior
state is switched off, the parking lights light up lights, footwell lights, entry lamps, and cour‐
in position . tesy lamps are controlled automatically.
Thumb wheel for the instrument lighting con‐
Activating/deactivating trols brightness of some of these features.
In some countries, daytime running lights are
mandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti‐ Overview
vate the daytime running lights.
Using iDrive:
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Daytime running lamps"
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
1 Interior lights
Adaptive headlight range 2 Reading lights
control
The adaptive headlight range control compen‐ Switching the interior lights on/off
sates for acceleration and braking operations
in order not to blind the oncoming traffic and to Press button.
achieve optimum illumination of the roadway.
To switch off permanently: press the button
and hold for approx. 3 seconds.
Instrument lighting
Switching the reading lights on/off
Functional requirement Press button.
The parking lights or low beams must be
switched on to adjust the brightness. Reading lights are located in the front next to
the interior light.
99
Controls Lights
Ambient light
General information
Depending on your optional features lighting
can be adjusted for some lights in the car's in‐
terior.
Selecting color scheme

1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Ambient:"
4. Select the desired setting.
To deactivate the ambient light: "Off".
With a color scheme selected and welcome
lights activated they illuminate in blue when
vehicle is unlocked.
Setting the brightness

Depending on the equipment, the brightness
of the ambient light can be adjusted via the
thumbwheel for the instrument lighting or on
the Control Display.
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Brightness:"
4. Adjust the brightness.
100
Safety Controls
Safety
Airbags
1 Front airbag, driver 4 Side airbag

2 Front airbag, front passenger 5 Knee airbag
3 Head airbag
Front airbags Side airbag

Front airbags help protect the driver and the In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the
front passenger by responding to frontal im‐ side of the body in the chest and lap area.
pacts in which safety belts alone would not
provide adequate protection. Head airbag
In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports
the head.
101
Controls Safety
Ejection Mitigation ▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the air‐

The head airbag system is designed as an bag cover panels, do not cover them or
ejection mitigation countermeasure to reduce modify them in any way.
the likelihood of ejections of vehicle occupants ▷ Dashboard and windshield on the front
through side windows during rollovers or side passenger side must stay clear - do not at‐
impact events. tach adhesive labels or coverings and do
not attach brackets or cables, for instance
Knee airbag for GPS devices or mobile phones.
The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal ▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on
impact. the front passenger side as a storage area.
▷ Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or
Protective action other objects on the front passenger seat
Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐ that are not specifically suited for seats
tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-end with integrated side airbags.
collisions. ▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as
jackets, over the backrests.
Information on optimum effect of the
▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐
airbags
nents or the wiring in the airbag system.
WARNING This also applies to steering wheel covers,
If the seat position is incorrect or the de‐ the dashboard, and the seats.
ployment area of the airbags is impaired, the ▷ Do not remove the airbag system.
airbag system cannot provide protection as in‐ Even when you follow all instructions very
tended and may cause additional injuries due closely, injury from contact with the airbags
to triggering. There is a risk of injuries or dan‐ cannot be fully ruled out in certain situations.
ger to life. Follow the information on achieving
the optimum protective effect of the airbag The ignition and inflation noise may lead to
system.◀ short-term and, in most cases, temporary
hearing impairment in sensitive occupants.
▷ Keep a distance from the airbags. Vehicle modifications for a person with disabili‐
▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads ties may affect the air bag system; therefore,
away from the side airbag. contact BMW Customer Relations or your au‐
▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the thorized BMW service center.
steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the Warnings and information on the airbags are
3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep also found on the sun visors.
the risk of injury to your hands or arms as
low as possible when the airbag is trig‐ Functional readiness of the airbag
gered. system
▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sit‐
ting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and Safety information
legs in the floor area and does not support WARNING
them on the dashboard.
Individual components can be hot after
▷ There should be no additional persons, an‐ triggering of the airbag system. There is a risk
imals or objects between an airbag and a of injury. Do not touch individual compo‐
person. nents.◀
102
Safety Controls
WARNING Safety information

Improperly executed work can lead to WARNING
failure, malfunction or unintentional triggering
To ensure the front-seat passenger air‐
of the airbag system. In the case of a malfunc‐
bag function, the system must be able to de‐
tion, the airbag system might not trigger as in‐
tect whether a person is sitting in the front
tended in the event of an accident despite re‐
passenger seat. The entire seat cushion area
spective accident severity. There is a risk of
must be used for this purpose. There is a risk
injuries or danger to life. Have the airbag sys‐
of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the
tem checked, repaired, dismantled and scrap‐
front passenger keeps his or her feet in the
ped by a dealer’s service center or another
floor area.◀
qualified service center or repair shop.◀
Malfunction of the automatic

Correct function
deactivation system
With standby state turned on warning When transporting older children and adults,
light in the instrument cluster lights up the front-seat passenger airbags may be deac‐
briefly indicating airbag system and tivated in certain sitting positions. In this case,
belt tension are functional. the indicator lamp for the front-seat passenger
airbags lights up.
Airbag system malfunctioning In this case, change the sitting position so that
▷ Warning lamp does not come on when the front-seat passenger airbags are activated
standby state is turned on. and the indicator lamp goes out.
▷ The warning lamp lights up continuously. If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have
the person sit in the rear.
Automatic deactivation of the front- To enable correct recognition of the occupied
seat passenger airbags seat cushion
▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats
Concept or other items to the front passenger seat
The system reads if the front passenger seat is unless they are specifically determined to
occupied by measuring the human body's re‐ be safe for use on the front passenger
sistance. seat.
Front, knee and side airbag on the front pas‐ ▷ Do not place any electronic devices on the
senger's side are either activated or deacti‐ passenger seat if a child restraint system is
vated. to be installed on it.
▷ Do not place objects under the seat that
General information could press against the seat from below.
Before transporting a child on the front pas‐ ▷ No moisture in or on the seat.
senger seat, refer to the safety notes and in‐
structions for children on the front passenger
seat, see Children.
103
Controls Safety
Indicator lamp for the front-seat pends on the positions of the driver's/front
passenger airbags passenger seat.
To maintain the accuracy of this function over
the long term, calibrate the front seats as soon
as a respective message appears on the Con‐
trol Display.
Calibrating the front seats

WARNING
There is a risk of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of
The indicator lamp for the front-seat passen‐ property damage. Make sure that the area of
ger airbags indicates the operating state of the movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐
front-seat passenger airbags. justment.◀
The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ei‐
A corresponding message appears on the
ther activated or deactivated.
Control Display.
▷ The indicator lamp lights up 1. Press the switch and move the respective
when a child is properly seat all the way forward, until it stops.
seated in a child restraint fix‐
2. Press the switch forward again. The seat
ing system or when the seat
still moves forward slightly.
is empty. The airbags on the
front passenger side are not 3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.
activated. The calibration procedure is completed when
▷ The indicator lamp does not light up when, the message on the Control Display disap‐
e.g., a correctly seated person of sufficient pears.
size is detected on the seat. The airbags If the message continues to be displayed, re‐
on the front passenger side are activated. peat the calibration.
If the message does not disappear after a re‐
Detected child restraint systems peat calibration, have the system checked as
The system generally detects children seated soon as possible.
in a child restraint system, particularly in child
restraint systems required by NHTSA at the
point in time when the vehicle was manufac‐ Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
tured. After installing a child restraint system,
make sure that the indicator light for the front- Concept
seat passenger airbags lights up. This indi‐
The system monitors tire inflation pressure in
cates that the child restraint system has been
the four mounted tires. The system warns you
detected and the front-seat passenger airbags
if there is a significant loss of pressure in one
are not activated.
or more tires. For this purpose, sensors in the
tire valves measure the tire inflation pressure
Strength of the driver's and front-seat
and tire temperature.
passenger airbag
The explosive power that activates driver's/
front-seat passenger airbags very much de‐
104
Safety Controls
General information Gray wheels

With use of the system observe further infor‐ It may not be possible to identify tire pressure
mation found under Tire inflation pressure, re‐ losses.
fer to page 187. Possible causes:
▷ Malfunction.
▷ The system is being reset.
The system must have been reset at the cor‐
rect tire inflation pressure; otherwise, reliable
signaling of a loss of tire inflation pressure is
Additonal information
not assured. The status control display additionally shows
the current tire inflation pressures and, de‐
Reset the system after each adjustment of the
pending on the model, tire temperatures. It
tire inflation pressure and after every tire or
shows the actual values read; they may vary
wheel change.
depending on driving style or weather condi‐
Always use wheels with TPM electronics to tions.
ensure that the system will operate properly.
Resetting the system
Status display
The system status can be displayed on the General information
Control Display, e.g., whether or not the sys‐ A reset must be performed in the following sit‐
tem is active. uations:
Using iDrive: ▷ After the tire inflation pressure has been
1. "Vehicle info" adjusted.
2. "Vehicle status" ▷ After a tire or wheel replacement.
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)"

Reset
The current status is displayed.
Using iDrive:
Tire conditions 1. "Vehicle info"

2. "Vehicle status"
General information
3. "Perform reset"
Tire and system status are indicated by the
4. Switch on drive-ready state and do not
color of the wheels and a SMS text message
drive off.
5. Reset tire inflation pressure: "Perform
All wheels green reset".
System is active and will issue a warning re‐ 6. Drive away.
lated to the tire inflation pressures stored dur‐ The wheels are displayed in gray and the sta‐
ing the last reset. tus is displayed.
After driving faster than 19 mph/30 km/h for a
One to four yellow wheels short period, the set tire inflation pressures are
A flat tire or major drop in the tire inflation accepted as reference values. The reset is
pressure has occurred in the indicated tires. completed automatically while driving.
The progress of the reset is displayed.
105
Controls Safety
After a successfully completed Reset, the In addition, a symbol with a Check Control
wheels on the Control Display are shown in message appears on the Control Display.
green and "Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
Symbol Possible cause
active" is displayed.
You may interrupt this trip at any time. When There is a flat tire or a major loss in
you continue the reset resumes automatically. tire inflation pressure.
Messages No reset was performed for the sys‐

tem. The system therefore issues a
General information warning based on the tire inflation
pressures before the last reset.
A low tire inflation pressure may cause the
DSC Dynamic Stability Control to be switched
on. Measure
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
If a tire inflation pressure check is Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
required vers.
2. Identify the damaged wheel. Check the air
Message
pressure in all four tires, for instance using
A symbol with a Check Control message ap‐ the tire pressure gage of a tire repair kit.
pears on the Control Display.
3. Repair the flat tire, for instance with a tire
Symbol Possible cause repair kit or by changing the tire.
The system has detected a wheel If no Mobility System is available, contact a

change, but no reset was done. dealer’s service center or another qualified
Inflation was not carried out accord‐
ing to specifications. System limits
The system does not function properly if a re‐
The tire inflation pressure has fallen set has not been carried out, for instance a flat
below the level of the last confirma‐ tire is reported though tire inflation pressures
tion. are correct.
The tire inflation pressure depends on the
Measure tire's temperature. Driving or exposure to the
1. Check the tire pressure and correct as sun will increase the tire's temperature, thus
needed. increasing the tire inflation pressure. The tire
2. Carry out a reset of the system after a tire inflation pressure is reduced when the tire
change. temperature falls again. These circumstances
may cause a warning when temperatures fall
At low tire inflation pressure very sharply.
The system cannot indicate sudden serious
Message tire damage caused by external circumstances.
A yellow warning light is illuminated in
the instrument cluster.
106
Safety Controls
Malfunction tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel ef‐

ficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the
The yellow warning light flashes and is
vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please
then illuminated continuously. A Check
note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
Control message is displayed. No flat
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's
tire or loss of tire inflation pressure can be de‐
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
tected.
even if under-inflation has not reached the
Examples and recommendations in the follow‐ level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
ing situations: tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also
been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indi‐
▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is
cator to indicate when the system is not oper‐
mounted: have it checked by a dealer’s
ating properly. The TPMS malfunction indica‐
service center or another qualified service
tor is combined with the low tire pressure
center or repair shop as needed.
telltale. When the system detects a malfunc‐
▷ Malfunction: have system checked by a tion, the telltale will flash for approximately one
dealer’s service center or another qualified minute and then remain continuously illumi‐
service center or repair shop. nated. This sequence will continue upon sub‐
▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset. sequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal‐
Reset the system again. function exists. When the malfunction indicator
▷ Interference caused by systems or devices is illuminated, the system may not be able to
with the same radio frequency: after leav‐ detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
ing the area of the interference, the system TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
automatically becomes active again. reasons, including the installation of replace‐
ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
Declaration according to NHTSA/ that prevent the TPMS from functioning prop‐
FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction tell‐
System tale after replacing one or more tires or wheels
on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement
Each tire, including the spare (if provided)
or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
should be checked monthly when cold and in‐
to continue to function properly.
flated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size FTM Flat Tire Monitor
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the Concept
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) The system detects tire inflation pressure loss
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has on the basis of rotation speed differences be‐
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring tween the individual wheels while driving.
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres‐ In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss, the
sure telltale when one or more of your tires is diameter and therefore the rotational speed of
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the corresponding wheel changes. The differ‐
the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you ence will be detected and reported as a flat
should stop and check your tires as soon as tire.
possible, and inflate them to the proper pres‐
The system does not measure the actual infla‐
sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated
tion pressure in the tires.
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
107
Controls Safety
Functional requirements 4. Switch on drive-ready state and do not

The system must have been initialized when drive off.
the tire inflation pressure was correct; other‐ 5. Start the initialization with "Perform reset".
wise, reliable flagging of a flat tire is not as‐ 6. Drive away.
sured:
The initialization is completed while driving,
▷ After a tire or wheel replacement, an initial‐ which can be interrupted at any time.
ization was performed with the correct tire
The initialization automatically continues when
inflation pressure.
driving resumes.
▷ After the tire inflation pressure was ad‐
justed to a new value, an initialization was Messages
performed.
General information
Status display
When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐
The current status of the flat tire monitor can bility Control is switched on, if needed.
be displayed, for instance whether the RPA is
active. Safety information
Using iDrive:
WARNING
1. "Vehicle info" A damaged regular tire with low or miss‐
2. "Vehicle status" ing tire inflation pressure impacts handling,
3. "Flat Tire Monitor (FTM)" such as steering and braking response. Run-
flat tires can maintain limited stability. There is
The status is displayed. a risk of an accident. Do not continue driving if
the vehicle is equipped with normal tires. Fol‐
Initialization required low the information on run-flat tires and contin‐
An initialization must be performed in the fol‐ ued driving with these tires.◀
lowing situations:
▷ After the tire inflation pressure has been Indication of a flat tire
adjusted.
A yellow warning light is illuminated in
▷ After a tire or wheel replacement. the instrument cluster.
Performing initialization In addition, a symbol with a Check Control

When initializing, the set tire inflation pres‐ message appears on the Control Display.
sures serve as reference values in order to de‐ Symbol Possible cause
tect a flat tire. Initialization is started by con‐
firming the tire inflation pressures. There is a flat tire or a major loss in
Do not initialize the system when driving with tire inflation pressure.
snow chains.
Using iDrive: Measure
1. "Vehicle info" 1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
2. "Vehicle status" Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
3. "Perform reset"
108
Safety Controls
2. Identify the damaged wheel. Check the air Safety information

pressure in all four tires, for instance using
WARNING
the tire pressure gage of a tire repair kit.
Indicators and warnings do not relieve
3. Repair the flat tire, for instance with a tire
the driver from personal responsibility. Due to
repair kit or by changing the tire.
system limits, warnings or reactions of the sys‐
If a Mobility System is not available, contact tem may not be output or they may be output
the service center. too late or incorrectly. There is a risk of an ac‐
cident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic
System limits conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively
The system could be delayed or malfunction in intervene in the respective situations.◀
▷ A natural, even tire inflation pressure loss Overview
in all four tires will not be recognized.
Therefore, check the tire inflation pressure Button in the vehicle
regularly.
▷ Sudden serious tire damage caused by ex‐
ternal circumstances cannot be recognized
in advance.
▷ When the system has not been initialized.
▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road
surface.
▷ Sporty driving style: spinning traction
wheels, high lateral acceleration (drifting).
Intelligent Safety button
▷ When driving with snow chains.
Switching on/off
Intelligent Safety
Some Intelligent Safety systems are automati‐
cally active after every departure. Some Intelli‐
Concept
gent Safety systems activate according to the
Intelligent Safety enables central operation of last setting.
the driver assistance system.
Press button briefly:
The intelligent safety systems can help pre‐
vent an imminent collision. ▷ The menu for the intelligent safety
system is displayed. The systems
▷ Approach control warning with City light
are individually switched off ac‐
braking function, refer to page 110.
cording to their respective set‐
▷ Pedestrian warning with Approach control, tings.
refer to page 112.
▷ LED lights up orange or goes out respec‐
tive to their individual settings.
Adjust as needed. Individual settings are
stored for the profile currently used.
109
Controls Safety
Press button again: Detection range

▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on.
▷ The LED lights up green.
Hold down button:

switched off.
▷ The LED goes out.
Objects that the system can detect are taken

into account.
Approach control warning
with City light braking Safety information
function
WARNING
Concept Indicators and warnings do not relieve
The system can help prevent accidents. If an the driver from personal responsibility. Due to
accident cannot be prevented, the system will system limits, warnings or reactions of the sys‐
help reduce the collision speed. tem may not be output or they may be output
too late or incorrectly. There is a risk of an ac‐
The system sounds a warning before an immi‐
cident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic
nent collision and actuates brakes independ‐
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively
ently, if needed.
intervene in the respective situations.◀
The automatic braking intervention is done
with limited force and duration.
Overview
A camera in the area of the rearview mirror
controls the system. Button in the vehicle
The approach control warning is available even
if cruise control has been deactivated.
With the vehicle approaching another vehicle
intentionally, the approach control warning and
braking are delayed in order to avoid false sys‐
tem reactions.
General information
The system warns at two levels of an imminent
danger of collision at speeds from approx. Intelligent Safety button
3 mph/5 km/h. Time of warnings may vary with
the current driving situation.
Appropriate braking kicks in at speeds of up to
35 mph/60 km/h.
110
Safety Controls
Camera Setting the warning time

The warning time can be set.
Using iDrive:
1. "Settings"
2. "Frontal Coll. Warning"
3. Activate the desired time on the Control
Display.
The selected time is stored for the driver pro‐
file currently used.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐ Warning with braking function
ror clean and clear.
Display
If a collision with a vehicle detected in this way
Switching on/off
is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the
instrument cluster.
Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active after every Symbol Measure
driving off.
Symbol lights up red: prewarning.
Switching on/off manually Brake and increase distance.
Press button briefly: Symbol flashes red and an acoustic

▷ The menu for the intelligent safety signal sounds: acute warning.
system is displayed. The systems You are requested to intervene by
are individually switched off ac‐ braking or make an evasive maneu‐
cording to their respective set‐ ver.
tings.
▷ LED lights up orange or goes out respec‐ Prewarning
tive to their individual settings.
This warning is issued, e.g., when there is the
Adjust as needed. The individual settings are impending danger of a collision or the distance
stored for the driver profile currently in use. to the vehicle ahead is too small.
The driver must intervene actively when there
Press button again:
is a prewarning.
switched on. Acute warning with braking function
▷ The LED lights up green. Acute warning is displayed in case of the immi‐
nent danger of a collision when the vehicle ap‐
Hold down button: proaches another object at a high differential
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are speed.
switched off. The driver must intervene actively when there
▷ The LED goes out. is an acute warning. If necessary, the driver is
111
Controls Safety
assisted by a minor automatic braking inter‐ ▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of
vention in a possible risk of collision. you, or sharply decelerating vehicles.
Acute warnings can also be triggered without ▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.
previous forewarning. ▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
Braking intervention Functional limitations

The warning prompts the driver himself/herself The system may not be fully functional in the
to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐ following situations:
ing force is used. Prerequisite for the brake
▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐
booster is sufficiently quick and hard stepping
fall.
on the brake pedal. The system can assist with
some braking intervention if there is a risk of a ▷ In tight curves.
collision. At low speeds vehicles may thus ▷ If the driving stability control systems are
come to a complete stop. deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.
The braking intervention is executed only if ve‐ ▷ If the field of view of the camera in the mir‐
hicle stability has not been restricted, for in‐ ror is dirty or obscured.
stance by deactivating the DSC Dynamic Sta‐ ▷ Up to 10 seconds after drive-ready state is
bility Control. established.
The braking intervention can be interrupted by ▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐ ately after vehicle delivery.
tively moving the steering wheel.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐
Object detection can be restricted. Observe cause of oncoming light, for instance from
the limitations of the detection range and func‐ the sun low in the sky.
tional restrictions.
Warning sensitivity
System limits
The more sensitive the warning settings are,
such as the warning time, the more warnings
Safety information
are displayed. However, there may also be an
WARNING excess of false warnings.
The system can react incorrectly or not
at all due to the system limits. There is a risk of
accidents or risk of property damage. Observe Pedestrian warning with
the information regarding the system limits Approach control
and actively intervene, if needed.◀
Concept
Detection range The system can help prevent accidents with
The system's detection potential is limited. pedestrians.
Thus, a system reaction might not come or When driving at city speeds, the system will is‐
might come late. sue a warning if there is imminent danger of a
E.g., the following situations may not be de‐ collision with pedestrians and includes a brak‐
tected: ing function.
▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach The camera in the area of the rearview mirror
them at high speed. controls the system.
112
Safety Controls
General information Overview

With sufficient brightness, the system warns
about possible collision danger with pedes‐ Button in the vehicle
trians starting at approx. 6 mph/10 km/h to ap‐
prox. 35 mph/60 km/h and assists with braking
before a collision.
The system reacts to people who are within
the detection range of the system.
Detection range
Intelligent Safety button
Camera
The detection area in front of the vehicle is div‐

ided into two areas:
▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the
vehicle.
▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and
left of the central area.
A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo‐
cated within the central area. A warning is is‐ Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐
sued about pedestrians who are located within ror clean and clear.
the extended area only if they are moving in
the direction of the central area. Switching on/off
Safety information Switching on automatically

WARNING The system is automatically active after every
driving off.
Indicators and warnings do not relieve
the driver from personal responsibility. Due to
Switching on/off manually
system limits, warnings or reactions of the sys‐
tem may not be output or they may be output Press button briefly:
too late or incorrectly. There is a risk of an ac‐ ▷ The menu for the intelligent safety
cident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic system is displayed. The systems
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively are individually switched off ac‐
intervene in the respective situations.◀ cording to their respective set‐
tings.
113
Controls Safety
▷ LED lights up orange or goes out respec‐ Object detection can be restricted. Observe
tive to their individual settings. the limitations of the detection range and func‐
Adjust as needed. The individual settings are tional restrictions.
stored for the driver profile currently in use.
System limits
Press button again:
Safety information
switched on. WARNING
▷ The LED lights up green. The system can react incorrectly or not
at all due to the system limits. There is a risk of
Hold down button: accidents or risk of property damage. Observe
▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are the information regarding the system limits
switched off. and actively intervene, if needed.◀
▷ The LED goes out.
Detection range
The detection potential of the camera is lim‐
Warning with braking function
ited.
Display Thus, a warning might not be issued or be is‐
If a collision with a person detected in this way sued late.
is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the E.g., the following situations may not be de‐
instrument cluster. tected:
The red symbol is displayed and a sig‐ ▷ Partially covered pedestrians.

nal sounds. ▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such
because of the viewing angle or contour.
Intervene immediately by braking or make an
▷ Pedestrians outside of the detection range.
evasive maneuver.
▷ Pedestrians having a body size less than
Braking intervention 32 in/80 cm.
The warning prompts the driver himself/herself

Functional limitations
to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐
ing force is used. Prerequisite for the brake The system may not be fully functional or may
booster is sufficiently quick and hard stepping not be available in the following situations:
on the brake pedal. The system can assist with ▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐
some braking intervention if there is a risk of a fall.
collision. At low speeds vehicles may thus ▷ In tight curves.
come to a complete stop.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are
The braking intervention is executed only if ve‐ deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.
hicle stability has not been restricted, for in‐
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the
stance by deactivating the DSC Dynamic Sta‐
windshield are dirty or covered.
bility Control.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after drive-ready state is
The braking intervention can be interrupted by
established.
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐
tively moving the steering wheel.
114
Safety Controls
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐ Here, a higher braking pressure must be gen‐
ately after vehicle delivery. erated for a short period when pressing the
▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐ brake pedal than during automatic braking.
cause of oncoming light, for instance from This interrupts automatic braking.
the sun low in the sky.
Interrupting automatic braking
▷ When it is dark outside.
It can be necessary to interrupt automatic
braking in certain situations, for example for an
evasive maneuver.
Brake force display
Interrupt automatic braking:
Concept ▷ By pressing the brake pedal.
Additional brake lamps indicate emergency ▷ By pressing the accelerator pedal.
braking to the traffic behind. This can reduce
the risk of a rear-end collision. At standstill
After coming to a halt, the brake is released
General information automatically.
▷ During normal braking or decelerating, the

top brake lights light up.
▷ During heavy brake application, the lower
brake lights additionally light up.
PostCrash – iBrake
Concept
In the event of an accident, the system can
bring the vehicle to a halt automatically without
intervention by the driver in certain situations.
This can reduce the risk of a further collision
and the consequences thereof.
Harder vehicle braking

It can be necessary to bring the vehicle in cer‐
tain situations to a halt quicker.
115
Controls Driving stability control systems
Driving stability control systems

Vehicle features and options Safety information
This chapter describes all standard, country- WARNING

specific and optional features offered with the Without energy recovery, there is no
series. It also describes features that are not braking power of the electric motor available.
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due The vehicle could roll further than anticipated.
to the selected options or country versions. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driv‐
This also applies to safety-related functions ing style to the traffic conditions. Watch traffic
and systems. When using these functions and closely and actively intervene in the respective
systems, the applicable laws and regulations situations.◀
must be observed.
DSC Dynamic Stability

Anti-lock Braking System Control
ABS
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during Concept
braking. Within the physical limits, the system helps to
The vehicle maintains its steering power even keep the vehicle on a steady course by reduc‐
during full brake applications, thus increasing ing engine speed and by applying brakes to
active safety. the individual wheels.
ABS is ready when vehicle is ready to drive.

General information
Dynamic Stability Control detects, e.g., the fol‐
lowing unstable driving conditions:
Brake assistant
▷ Fishtailing, which can lead to oversteering.
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system
▷ Loss of traction of the front wheels, which
automatically produces the greatest possible
can lead to understeering.
braking force boost. It reduces the braking dis‐
tance to a minimum during emergency stop. Dynamic Traction Control DTC, refer to
This system utilizes all of the benefits provided page 117, is a version of the DSC where for‐
by ABS. ward momentum is optimized.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal
for the duration of the emergency stop.
Safety information
WARNING
Energy recovery personal responsibility to correctly assess the
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
General information tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
In the event of danger, such as with locked situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust
wheels, energy recovery is reduced in order to the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
prevent unstable driving situations.
116
Driving stability control systems Controls
traffic closely and actively intervene in the re‐ TRACTION and the DSC OFF indicator
spective situations.◀ light lights up.
Indicator/warning lights Deactivating DTC

Using iDrive:
The indicator lamp flashes: DSC con‐
trols the drive and braking forces. 1. "Settings"
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC has 2. "Traction control"
malfunctioned. 3. "Normal"
TRACTION and the DSC OFF indicator
light go out.
DTC Dynamic Traction When drive-ready state is switched on, DTC is
Control automatically deactivated.
Concept
DTC is a version of the DSC where forward Driving Dynamics Control
momentum is optimized.
The system ensures maximum headway on Concept
special road conditions or loose road surfaces, The Driving Dynamics Control helps to fine-
for instance unplowed snowy roads, but with tune the vehicle's settings and features. Vari‐
somewhat limited driving stability. ous programs can be selected for this purpose.
When DTC is activated, the vehicle has maxi‐
mum traction. Driving stability is limited during Overview
acceleration and when driving in curves.
Button in the vehicle
Drive carefully.
You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC
under the following special circumstances:
▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared,
snow-covered roads.
▷ When freeing vehicle from deep snow or
driving off from loose ground.
▷ When driving with snow chains.
Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic

Traction Control Operating the programs
Activating DTC Driving Dynamics Control Program

Using iDrive: COMFORT
1. "Settings" ECO PRO
2. "Traction control" ECO PRO+
3. "TRACTION"
117
Controls Driving stability control systems
COMFORT Displays
Concept Program selection

For balanced tuning. Pressing the button displays a
list of the selectable programs.
Activating COMFORT Depending on your vehicle's op‐
Press button repeatedly until COM‐ tional features, the list in the in‐
FORT is displayed in the instrument strument cluster can differ from
cluster. the illustration shown.
ECO PRO Selected program

ECO PRO, refer to page 169, provides consis‐ The ECO PRO and ECO PRO+ driving pro‐
tent tuning to maximize range. grams are shown in the instrument cluster. In
addition, the display on the automatic climate
Comfort functions and the engine Controller
control lights up.
are adjusted.
The program can be configured to individual
specifications. Drive-off assistant
Activating ECO PRO Concept
Press button repeatedly until ECO This system supports driving off on inclines.
PRO is displayed in the instrument The parking brake is not required.
cluster.
Driving off with the drive-off assistant
Configuring ECO PRO 1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot
1. Activate ECO PRO. brake.
2. "Configure ECO PRO" 2. Release the foot brake and drive off with‐
out delay.
Make the desired settings.
After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is
ECO PRO+ held in place for approx. 2 seconds.
Depending on the vehicle load, the vehicle may
Concept roll back slightly.
ECO PRO+, refer to page 169, also limits the
maximum speed and reduces climate control
and lighting functions.
Comfort functions and the engine Controller
are adjusted.
Activating ECO PRO+

Press button repeatedly until ECO
PRO+ is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
118
Driving comfort Controls
Driving comfort
Vehicle features and options Depending on the driving settings, the features
of the cruise control can change in certain
This chapter describes all standard, country- areas.
series. It also describes features that are not Safety information
to the selected options or country versions. WARNING
This also applies to safety-related functions The system does not release from the
and systems. When using these functions and personal responsibility to correctly assess the
systems, the applicable laws and regulations traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
must be observed. tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust
the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
Camera-based cruise control traffic closely and actively intervene in the re‐
spective situations.◀
with Stop&Go function, ACC
WARNING
Concept
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
Using this system, a desired speed and a dis‐ and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an ac‐
tance to a vehicle ahead can be adjusted using cident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle
the buttons on the steering wheel. against rolling.
The system maintains the desired speed on In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
clear roads. For this purpose, the vehicle ac‐ against rolling away, observe the following:
celerates or brakes automatically.
▷ Set the parking brake.
If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the system
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
adjusts the speed of your vehicle so that the
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
set distance to the vehicle ahead is main‐
curb.
tained. The speed is adjusted as far as the
given situation allows. ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, e.g., with a wheel
The distance can be adjusted in several steps.
chock.◀
For safety reasons, it depends on the respec‐
tive speed. WARNING
If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt, and The desired speed can be incorrectly ad‐
then proceeds to drive again within a brief pe‐ justed or called up by mistake. There is a risk
riod, the system is able to detect this within the of an accident. Adjust the desired speed to the
given system limits. traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐
tively intervene in the respective situations.◀
General information
WARNING
A camera on the interior rear view mirror is
used to detect vehicles driving ahead. Risk of accident due to too high speed
differences to other vehicles, e.g., in the fol‐
lowing situations:
119
Controls Driving comfort
▷ When fast approaching a slowly moving Functional requirements

vehicle.
▷ Suddenly swerving vehicle onto the own Speed range
lane. The system is best used on well-constructed
▷ When fast approaching standing vehicles. roads.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. The desired speed can be set between
Watch traffic closely and actively intervene in 20 mph/30 km/h and 85 mph/140 km/h.
the respective situations.◀ The system can also be activated when sta‐
tionary.
Overview
Switching on/off and interrupting
Buttons on the steering wheel cruise control
Button Function Switching on

Press button on the steering wheel.
Cruise control on/off, interrupting,
refer to page 120.
Store/maintain speed, refer to cluster lights up.
page 121.
Resume speed, continue cruise con‐ Desired speed becomes current speed
trol, refer to page 122. and will be displayed - beside the sym‐
bol - in the Info Display.
Adjust distance, refer to page 121.
Cruise control can be used.
Rocker switch: DSC will be switched on, if needed.
Set speed, refer to page 121.
Switching off
To switch off the system while standing, step
Camera on brake pedal at the same time.
A camera in the area of the interior mirror
serves to detect vehicles.
▷ If active: press twice.

▷ If interrupted: press once.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed
is deleted.
Interrupting manually
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐ If interrupting the system while stationary,
ror clean and clear. press on the brake pedal at the same time.
120
Interrupting automatically Press button.

The system is automatically interrupted in the
following situations: Changing the speed
▷ When the driver applies the brakes.
▷ When selector lever position D is disen‐
gaged.
▷ When DTC is activated.
▷ When DSC is actively controlling stability.
▷ If the safety belt is unbuckled and the driv‐
er's door is opened while the vehicle is
standing still.
▷ If the detection range of the camera is im‐ Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
paired, for instance by soiling, heavy pre‐ until the desired speed is set.
cipitation or glare effects from the sun.
▷ After a stationary period of approx. 3 sec‐ If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
onds when the vehicle has been braked to vehicle reaches the stored speed when the
a stop by the system. road is clear.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to
Setting the speed the point of resistance, the desired speed
increases or decreases by approx.
Maintaining/storing the speed 1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed
past the resistance point, the desired
speed changes by a maximum of 5 mph/
10 km/h.
Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the
action.
Adjusting distance
Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐ Safety information
terrupted. WARNING
When the system is switched on, the current The system does not release from the
speed is maintained and stored as the desired personal responsibility. Due to the system lim‐
speed. its, braking can be late. There is a risk of acci‐
dents or risk of property damage. Be aware to
The stored speed is displayed in the speedom‐
the traffic situation at all times. Adjust the dis‐
eter and permanently in the instrument cluster,
tance to the traffic and weather conditions and
refer to page 122.
maintain the prescribed safety distance, possi‐
DSC will be switched on, if needed. bly by braking.◀
The speed can also be stored by
pressing a button.
121
Adjusting The indicator lamp in the instrument

cluster lights up.
Press button repeatedly until the de‐
sired distance is set. To switch distance control back on, press but‐
ton again briefly.
The set distance is briefly displayed in
the left part of the instrument cluster. After changing over distance control, a Check
Control message is displayed.
Continuing cruise control Displays in the instrument cluster
General information Desired speed and stored speed

An interrupted cruise control can be continued The desired speed is displayed next to
by calling up the stored speed. the symbol in the Info Display.
Make sure that the difference between current ▷ Display lights up green: system is
speed and stored speed is not too large before active, the display indicates the de‐
calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, unin‐ sired speed.
tentional braking or accelerating may occur.
▷ Display lights up orange: system is inter‐
In the following cases, the stored speed value rupted, the display indicates the stored
is deleted and cannot be called up again: speed.
▷ When the system is switched off. ▷ No display: system is switched off.
▷ When drive-ready state is switched off.
Status display
Calling up stored speed and distance
Selected desired speed.
Press button with the system
switched on.
Desired speed and distance are then contin‐ If no speed is indicated, it is possible that the
ued with these settings. The instrument clus‐ conditions necessary for operation are not cur‐
ter briefly displays the selected distance. rently fulfilled.
Switching distance control on/off Distance to vehicle ahead of you

Selected distance from the vehicle driving
Safety information ahead is briefly displayed in the left hand por‐
tion of the instrument cluster.
WARNING
The system does not react to traffic driv‐ Distance display
ing ahead of you, but instead maintains the Distance 1
stored speed. There is a risk of accidents or
risk of property damage. Adjust the desired
speed to the traffic conditions and brake as Distance 2
needed.◀
Switching distance control off

Press and hold this button.
122
Distance display System limits
Distance 3 Detection range
Distance 4
This value is set after the system is
switched on.
Detected vehicle
Symbol lights up orange:
A vehicle has been detected ahead of
The detection capacity of the system and the
you.
automatic braking capacity are limited.
Distance control is deactivated be‐ Two-wheeled vehicles for instance might not
cause the accelerator pedal is being be detected.
pressed; a vehicle was detected.
Deceleration
Flashing bar: the detected vehicle has
driven away. The system also does not decelerate in the fol‐
lowing situations:
ACC does not accelerate. To acceler‐
ate, activate ACC by briefly stepping on the ac‐ ▷ For pedestrians, cyclists or similarly slow-
celerator pedal, pressing the RES button or moving road users.
rocker switch. ▷ For red traffic lights.
▷ For cross traffic.
Indicator/warning lights ▷ For oncoming traffic.
Symbol flashes orange: ▷ Unlit vehicles or vehicles with nonworking
The conditions are not adequate for lighting at night.
the system to work.
Swerving vehicles
The system was deactivated but applies the
brakes until you actively resume control by
pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator
pedal.
Symbol flashes red and a signal

sounds:
You are requested to intervene by
braking or make an evasive maneuver.
The system has been interrupted or A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected
distance control is deactivated be‐ until it is completely within the same lane as
cause the accelerator pedal is being your vehicle.
pressed; a vehicle was not detected.
123
If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly ates you may compensate it by briefly acceler‐
swerves into your lane, the system may not be ating.
able to automatically restore the selected dis‐ After releasing the accelerator pedal the sys‐
tance. It may not be possible to restore the se‐ tem is reactivated and controls speed inde‐
lected distance in certain situations, including pendently.
if you are driving significantly faster than vehi‐
cles driving ahead of you, for instance when
rapidly approaching a truck. When a vehicle Driving away
driving ahead of you is reliably detected, the In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive off
system requests that the driver intervene by automatically; for example:
braking and carrying out evasive maneuvers, if ▷ On steep inclines.
needed.
▷ From bumps in the road.
In these cases, step on the accelerator pedal.
Cornering
Weather
The following restrictions can occur under un‐
favorable weather or light conditions:
▷ Poorer vehicle recognition.
▷ Short-term interruptions for vehicles that
are already recognized.
Examples of unfavorable weather or light con‐
ditions:
If the desired speed is too high for a curve, the ▷ Rain.
speed is reduced slightly, although curves can‐ ▷ Snowfall.
not be anticipated in advance. Therefore, drive
▷ Slush.
into a curve at an appropriate speed.
▷ Fog.
The system has a limited detection range. Sit‐
uations can arise in tight curves where a vehi‐ ▷ Glare.
cle driving ahead will not be detected or will be Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic
detected very late. situation. If necessary, intervene actively, for
instance by braking, steering or evading.
Engine power
The desired speed is also maintained downhill,
but may not be maintained on uphill grades if
engine power is insufficient.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed if the
system fails.
When you approach a curve the system may
The system may not be fully functional in the
briefly report vehicles in the next lane due to
following situations:
the bend of the curve. If the system deceler‐
124
▷ When an object was not correctly de‐ ▷ On winding roads.

tected. ▷ In heavy traffic.
▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐ ▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or
fall. on a loose road surface.
▷ In tight curves. There is a risk of accidents or risk of property
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the damage. Only use the system if driving at con‐
windshield are dirty or covered. stant speed is possible.◀
▷ When driving toward bright lights.
WARNING
▷ Up to 20 seconds after drive-ready state is
The desired speed can be incorrectly ad‐
switched on via the Start/Stop button.
justed or called up by mistake. There is a risk
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐ of an accident. Adjust the desired speed to the
ately after vehicle delivery. traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐
tively intervene in the respective situations.◀
Cruise control Overview

Concept Buttons on the steering wheel
Using this system, a desired speed can be ad‐
justed using the buttons on the steering wheel. Button Function
The system maintains the desired speed. The
system accelerates and brakes automatically Cruise control on/off, interrupting,
as needed. refer to page 125.
Store speed, refer to page 126.

General information
Depending on the driving settings, the features
Resume speed, continue cruise con‐
of the cruise control can change in certain
trol, refer to page 127.
areas.
Rocker switch: adjust speed, refer to
Safety information page 126.
WARNING
The system does not release from the Switching on/off and interrupting
personal responsibility to correctly assess the cruise control
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic Switching on
situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust Press button on the steering wheel.
traffic closely and actively intervene in the re‐
spective situations.◀
cluster lights up.
WARNING
Desired speed becomes current speed
The use of the system can lead to an in‐
and will be displayed - beside the sym‐
creased risk of accidents in the following situa‐
bol - in the Info Display.
tions:
125
Cruise control can be used. The stored speed is displayed in the instru‐
DSC will be switched on, if needed. ment cluster.
DSC will be switched on, if needed.
Switching off The speed can also be stored by pressing a
Press button on the steering wheel. button.
Press button.
▷ If active: press twice.
▷ If interrupted: press once.
Changing the speed
The displays go out. The stored desired speed
is deleted.
Interrupting manually
When active, press the button on the
steering wheel.
Interrupting automatically
The system is automatically interrupted in the
following situations: Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
▷ When the driver applies the brakes. until the desired speed is set.
▷ When selector lever position D is disen‐ If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
gaged. vehicle reaches the stored speed when the
▷ When DTC is activated. road is clear.
▷ When DSC is actively controlling stability. ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to
the point of resistance, the desired speed
Setting the speed increases or decreases by approx.
1 mph/1 km/h.
Maintaining/storing the speed ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed
past the point of resistance, the desired
speed increases or decreases by a maxi‐
mum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
The maximum speed that can be set de‐
pends on the vehicle.
▷ Pressing the rocker switch to the resist‐
ance point and holding it accelerates or de‐
celerates the vehicle without requiring
pressure on the accelerator pedal.
Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐ After the rocker switch is released, the ve‐
terrupted. hicle maintains its final speed. Pressing the
switch beyond the resistance point causes
When the system is switched on, the current
the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.
speed is maintained and stored as the desired
speed.
126
Continuing cruise control Status display

Selected desired speed.
General information
An interrupted cruise control can be continued
by calling up the stored speed. If no speed is indicated, it is possible that the
Make sure that the difference between current conditions necessary for operation are not cur‐
speed and stored speed is not too large before rently fulfilled.
calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, unin‐
tentional braking or accelerating may occur. System limits
In the following cases, the stored speed value
Engine power
is deleted and cannot be called up again:
The desired speed is also maintained downhill,
▷ When the system is switched off.
but may not be maintained on uphill grades if
▷ When drive-ready state is switched off. engine power is insufficient.
Calling up stored speed

Press button on the steering wheel. PDC Park Distance Control
The stored speed is reached again and main‐ Concept

tained. PDC is a support when parking. When you
slowly approach an object in the rear - or also
Displays in the instrument cluster in the front of the vehicle if the feature is availa‐
ble - then the object is reported through:
Indicator lamp ▷ Signal tones.
Depending on how the vehicle is equip‐ ▷ Visual display.
ped, the indicator lamp in the instru‐
ment cluster indicates whether the sys‐ General information
tem is switched on. The ultrasound sensors for measuring the dis‐
tances are located in the bumpers.
Desired speed and stored speed The maneuvering range, depending on the ob‐
The desired speed is displayed next to stacle and environmental conditions, is approx.
the symbol in the Info Display. 6 ft/2 m.
▷ Display lights up green: system is An acoustic warning is first given in the follow‐
active, the display indicates the de‐ ing situations:
sired speed. ▷ By the front sensors and the two rear cor‐
▷ Display lights up orange: system is inter‐ ner sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm from
rupted, the display indicates the stored the object.
speed. ▷ By the rear middle sensors at a distance to
▷ No display: system is switched off. the object of approx. 5 ft/1.50 m.
▷ When a collision is imminent.
127
Safety information ▷ Do not cover sensors, for instance with

stickers, bicycle racks.
WARNING
▷ Keep the sensors clean and unobstructed.
personal responsibility to correctly assess the
Switching on/off
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust
Switching on automatically
the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch The system switches on automatically in the
traffic closely and actively intervene in the re‐ following situations:
spective situations.◀ ▷ If selector lever position R is engaged while
drive-ready state is switched on.
WARNING
The rearview camera also switches on.
Due to high speeds when PDC is acti‐
vated, the warning can be delayed due to ▷ If equipped with front PDC: when obsta‐
physical circumstances. There is a risk of injury cles are detected behind or in front of the
or risk of property damage. Avoid approaching vehicle by PDC and the speed is slower
an object too fast. Avoid driving off fast while than approx. 2.5 mph/4 km/h.
PDC is not yet active.◀ You may switch off automatic activation when
obstacles are detected. Using iDrive:
Overview 1. "Settings"
2. "Parking"
With front PDC: button in vehicle
3. Select setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
If necessary, switch off automatic PDC activa‐
tion on obstacle detection, for instance in vehi‐
cle washes, to reduce false alarms.
Automatic deactivation during forward

travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
Park assistance button
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on, if needed.
Ultrasound sensors
With front PDC: switching on/off
Ultrasound sensors of the PDC,
manually
for instance in the bumpers.
Press park assistance button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.

▷ Off: the LED goes out.
Ensure full functionality:
128
The rearview camera image is displayed if the A display appears as soon as Park Distance
reverse gear is engaged when pressing the Control (PDC) is activated.
park assistance button. The range of the sensors is represented in the
colors green, yellow and red.
WARNING
When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐
played, the switch can be made to PDC:
Signal tones
"Rear view camera"
An intermittent tone indicates when the vehi‐
cle is approaching an object. E.g., if an object
is detected to the left rear of the vehicle, a sig‐
System limits
nal tone sounds from the left rear speaker.
Safety information
The shorter the distance to the object, the
shorter the intervals. WARNING
If the distance to a detected object is less than The system can react incorrectly or not
approx. 10 inches/25 cm, a continuous tone is at all due to the system limits. There is a risk of
sounded. accidents or risk of property damage. Observe
the information regarding the system limits
With front PDC: if objects are simultaneously
and actively intervene, if needed.◀
located both in front of and behind the vehicle,
an alternating continuous signal is sounded.
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
The signal tone is switched off, when selector
lever position P is engaged. Ultrasonic measurements might not function in
Volume ▷ For small children and animals.
The ratio of the PDC signal tone volume to the ▷ For persons with certain clothing, e.g.,
entertainment volume can be adjusted. coats.
Using iDrive: ▷ With external interference of the ultra‐
sound, e.g., from passing vehicles or loud
1. "Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings"
machines.
2. "Tone"
▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam‐
3. "Volume settings" aged or out of position.
4. "PDC" ▷ Under certain weather conditions such as
5. Turn the Controller until the desired set‐ high relative humidity, rain, snowfall, ex‐
ting is selected. treme heat or strong wind.
6. Press the Controller. ▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other
Settings are stored for the profile currently vehicles.
used. ▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With moving objects.
Visual warning ▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
The approach of the vehicle to an object can ledges or cargo.
be shown on the Control Display. Objects that
▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
are farther away are already displayed on the
Control Display before a signal sounds. ▷ With objects with a fine surface structure
such as fences.
129
▷ For objects with porous surfaces. Rearview camera

▷ If cargo protrudes.
▷ Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, Concept
can move into the blind area of the sensors The rearview camera provides assistance in
before or after a continuous tone sounds. parking and maneuvering backwards. The area
behind the vehicle is shown on the Control
False warnings Display.
The system may issue a warning under the fol‐
lowing conditions even though there is no ob‐ Safety information
stacle within the detection range: WARNING
▷ In heavy rain. The system does not relieve from the
▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered personal responsibility to correctly assess the
with ice. traffic situation. There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driving style to the traffic condi‐
▷ When sensors are covered in snow.
tions. Watch traffic and vehicle surroundings
▷ On rough road surfaces. closely and actively intervene in the respective
▷ On uneven surfaces, such as speed situations.◀
bumps.
▷ In large buildings with right angles and Overview
smooth walls, for instance in underground
garages. If the vehicle is equipped accordingly:
▷ In automatic vehicle washes. button in the vehicle
▷ Due to heavy exhaust.
▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, for in‐
stance sweeping machines, high pressure
steam cleaners or neon lights.
If necessary, switch off automatic PDC activa‐
tion on obstacle detection, for instance in vehi‐
cle washes, to reduce false alarms.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed. Park assistance button
Red symbol is displayed, and the range

of the sensors is dimmed on the Con‐
trol Display.
PDC has failed. Have the system checked by a

dealer’s service center or another qualified
130
Camera The rearview camera image is displayed.
Display on the Control Display
▷ The rearview camera is switched on.
▷ The tailgate is fully closed.
▷ Keep the recording range of the camera
clear. Protruding cargo or carrier systems
and trailers that are not connected to a
The camera lens is located underneath the tail‐ trailer power socket can lead to malfunc‐
gate. tions.
The image quality may be impaired by dirt. If
necessary, clean the camera lens. Activating assistance functions
More than one assistance function can be ac‐
tive at the same time.
Switching on/off
▷ Parking aid lines
Switching on automatically "Parking aid lines"
The system is automatically switched on if se‐ Lanes and turning radius are indicated.
lector lever position R is engaged when the ▷ Obstacle marking
drive-ready state is switched on.
"Obstacle marking"
Automatic deactivation during forward If the vehicle is equipped accordingly, spa‐
travel tially shaped markings are displayed.
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded. Pathway lines
Switch the system back on, if needed.
If the vehicle is equipped accordingly:

switching on/off manually
▷ On: the LED lights up.

▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The PDC is shown on the Control Display. Pathway lines can be superimposed on the im‐
The rearview camera image is displayed if the age of the rearview camera.
reverse gear is engaged when pressing the Pathway lines help you to estimate the space
park assistance button. required when parking and maneuvering on
level roads.
Switching the view via iDrive Pathway lines depend on the current steering
With PDC activated: angle and are continuously adjusted to the
"Rear view camera" steering wheel movements.
131
Turning radius lines Parking using pathway and turning

radius lines
1. Position the vehicle so that the turning ra‐
dius lines lead to within the limits of the
parking space.
Turning radius lines can only be superimposed

on the rearview camera image together with
pathway lines.
Turning radius lines show the course of the
smallest possible turning radius on a level 2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where
road. the pathway line covers the corresponding
Only one turning radius line is displayed after turning radius line.
the steering wheel is turned past a certain an‐
gle.
Obstacle marking
Display settings
Brightness
With the rearview camera switched on:
Obstacles behind the vehicle are detected, if
the vehicle is equipped accordingly, by the 1. Select the symbol.
PDC sensors and the rearview camera. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
If the vehicle is equipped accordingly, obstacle is reached, and press the controller.
markings can be faded into the image of the
rearview camera. Contrast
The colored thresholds of the obstacle mark‐ With the rearview camera switched on:
ings match the markings of the PDC.
1. Select the symbol.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached, and press the controller.
132
System limits Press and hold the park assistance button for
the duration of the parking procedure.
Detection of objects System status and instructions on required ac‐
Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding tions are displayed on the Control Display.
objects such as ledges may not be detected by The parking assistant uses the sensors of PDC
the system. Park Distance Control.
If the vehicle is equipped accordingly, certain
assistance functions also take into account Safety information
data from the PDC.
WARNING
Follow instructions in the PDC chapter.
The objects displayed on the Control Display personal responsibility to correctly assess the
may be closer than they appear. Do not esti‐ traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
mate the distance from the objects on the dis‐ tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
play. situations. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust
traffic closely and actively intervene in the re‐
Parking assistant spective situations.◀
Concept NOTE
The parking assistant can steer the vehi‐
cle over or onto curbs. There is a risk of prop‐
erty damage. Watch traffic closely and actively
intervene in the respective situations.◀
Also observe the safety information for PDC

Park Distance Control.
Overview
This system assists the driver in parking paral‐ Button in the vehicle
lel to the road.
General information
Parking assistant handling is divided into three
steps:
▷ Switching on and activating.
▷ Parking space search.
▷ Parking.
Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces
Park assistance button
on both sides of the vehicle.
The parking assistant calculates the best pos‐
sible parking line and during the parking proce‐
dure takes control of steering, the acceleration
and braking, and if needed, changes the gears.
133
Ultrasound sensors Switching on and activating
Switching on with the button

The LED lights up.
The current status of the parking space search

is indicated on the Control Display.
Parking assistant is activated automatically.
The ultrasound sensors for measuring parking Switching on with reverse gear
spaces are located on the side of the vehicle. Shift into reverse.
The current status of the parking space search
Functional requirements is indicated on the Control Display.
To activate: "Parking Assistant"
Ultrasound sensors
Ensure full functionality: Display on the Control Display
▷ Do not cover sensors, for instance with
stickers. System activated/deactivated
▷ Keep the sensors clean and unobstructed.
Symbol Meaning
For measuring parking spaces Gray: the system is not available.
▷ Maximum speed while driving forward ap‐ White: the system is available but
prox. 22 mph/35 km/h. not activated.
▷ Maximum distance to row of parked vehi‐
The system is activated.
cles: 5 ft/1.5 m.
Suitable parking space Parking space search and system

▷ Gap between two objects with a minimum
status
length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
▷ Min. length of gap between two objects:
your vehicle's length plus approx.
4 ft/1.2 m.
▷ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
For parking
▷ Doors and tailgate are closed.
▷ The parking brake is released. ▷ Colored symbols, see arrows, on the side
▷ Driver's safety belt is fastened. of the vehicle image; the parking assistant
is activated and the parking space search
is active.
134
▷ Control Display shows suitable parking Interrupting manually

spaces at the edge of the road next to the The parking assistant can be interrupted at any
vehicle symbol. When the parking assistant time:
is active, suitable parking spaces are high‐
▷ Press park assistance button.
lighted.
▷ The parking procedure is ac‐
▷ "Parking Assistant" Select the symbol
tive. Steering control has
been taken over by system.
Interrupting automatically
The system is interrupted automatically in the
▷ Parking space search is always active
following situations:
whenever the vehicle is moving forward
slow and straight, even if the system is de‐ ▷ If the driver grasps the steering wheel or
activated. When the system is deactivated, takes over steering.
the displays on the Control Display are ▷ Possibly on snow-covered or slippery road
shown in gray. surfaces.
▷ When there are obstacles that are hard to
Parking using the parking assistant overcome, such as curbs.
▷ When there are obstacles that suddenly
Parking
appear.
1. Press park assistance button or shift ▷ If the PDC Park Distance Control displays
into reverse gear to switch the parking as‐ clearances that are too small.
sistant on, refer to page 134. Activate the ▷ If a maximum number of parking attempts
parking assistant, if needed. or the time taken for parking is exceeded.
Parking assistant is activated. ▷ When switching to another function on the
2. Pass the row of parked vehicles at a speed Control Display.
of up to approx. 22 mph/35 km/h and at a ▷ When the park assistance button is re‐
distance of maximum 5 ft/1.5 m. leased.
The status of the parking space search and ▷ If the tailgate is open.
possible parking spaces are displayed on ▷ If doors are open.
the Control Display, refer to page 134.
▷ When setting the parking brake.
3. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐
play. ▷ During acceleration.
Press and hold the park assistance button ▷ When braking.

for the duration of the parking procedure. ▷ When unfastening the driver's safety belt.
At the end of the parking procedure, the P A Check Control message is displayed.
selector lever position is set.
The end of the parking procedure is indi‐ Resuming
cated on the Control Display. An interrupted parking procedure can be con‐
4. Adjust the parking position yourself, if tinued, if needed.
needed. Reactivate the parking assistant, refer to
page 134, and follow the instructions on the
Control Display.
135
Switching off ▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam‐

The system can be switched off as follows: aged or out of position.
▷ Press park assistance button. ▷ Under certain weather conditions such as
high relative humidity, rain, snowfall, ex‐
treme heat or strong wind.
System limits ▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other
vehicles.
Safety information ▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
WARNING ▷ With moving objects.
The system can react incorrectly or not ▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
at all due to the system limits. There is a risk of ledges or cargo.
accidents or risk of property damage. Observe
▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
the information regarding the system limits
and actively intervene, if needed.◀ ▷ With objects with a fine surface structure
such as fences.
No parking assistance ▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
The parking assistant does not offer assis‐ ▷ If cargo protrudes.

tance in the following situations: ▷ Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs,
▷ In tight curves. can move into the blind area of the sensors
before or after a continuous tone sounds.
Functional limitations Parking spaces that are not suitable may be
The system may not be fully functional in the detected or suitable parking spaces may not
following situations: be detected at all.
▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel

Malfunction
roads.
A Check Control message is displayed.
▷ On slippery ground.
The parking assistant failed. Have the system
▷ On steep uphill or downhill grades.
checked by a dealer’s service center or an‐
▷ With accumulations of leaves/snow in the other qualified service center or repair shop.
parking space.
▷ With ditches or edges, for instance an
edge of a port.
Limits of ultrasonic measurement

Ultrasonic measurements might not function in
▷ For small children and animals.
▷ For persons with certain clothing, e.g.,
coats.
▷ With external interference of the ultra‐
sound, e.g., from passing vehicles or loud
machines.
136
Climate control Controls
Climate control
Vehicle features and options Interior air quality
This chapter describes all standard, country- The air quality inside the vehicle is improved
specific and optional features offered with the by an emissions-tested interior, a microfilter,
series. It also describes features that are not and a climate-control system for regulating
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due temperature, air flow, and recirculated-air
to the selected options or country versions. mode.
This also applies to safety-related functions In addition there are other functions which de‐
and systems. When using these functions and pend on the vehicle's equipment, for instance
systems, the applicable laws and regulations microfilter/activated-charcoal filter, automatic
must be observed. climate control with automatic recirculated-air
control AUC, and parked-car ventilation.
Air conditioner
1 Seat heating, left 57 6 Air distribution, floor area

2 Air conditioning 7 Remove ice and condensation
3 Temperature 8 Rear window defroster
4 Air distribution, windows 9 Recirculated-air mode
5 Air distribution, upper body region 10 Seat heating, right 57
137
Controls Climate control
11 Air flow
Climate control functions in detail Switching on/off

Press button.
Switching the system on/off
Air conditioning is switched on or off.
Switching on
Depending on the weather, the windshield and
Press any button except for the following: side windows may fog up briefly when drive-
▷ Rear window defroster. ready state is activated.
▷ Seat heating. The air conditioner produces condensation
water, refer to page 165, that will exit from be‐
Switching off low the vehicle.
Press and hold the left button until the

Recirculated-air mode
control switches off.
Concept
Temperature You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu‐
tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐
Concept rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The
The system heats or cools, depending on the system then recirculates the air flow within the
set temperature. vehicle.
Settings Operation
Turn the ring to set the desired Press button repeatedly to select an
temperature. operating mode:
To reduce the energy consump‐
▷ LED off: outside air flows in continuously.
tion, the cooling or heating out‐
put is reduced or deactivated as ▷ LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply
per ECO-PRO mode, refer to page 169. of outside air into the vehicle is perma‐
nently blocked.
To prevent window fogging, recirculated-air
Air conditioning
mode switches off automatically after a certain
amount of time, depending on the environ‐
Concept
mental conditions.
The air in the car's interior will be cooled and
With constant recirculated-air mode, the air
dehumidified and, depending on the tempera‐
quality in the car's interior deteriorates and the
ture setting, warmed again.
fogging of the windows increases.
Cooling of the car's interior with the A/C button
If the windows fog over, switch off recircu‐
is only possible with drive-ready state
lated-air mode and increase the air flow, if
switched on.
needed.
138
Controlling the air flow manually Defrosting windows and removing

condensation
Concept
The air flow for climate control can be adjusted Concept
manually. Ice and condensation are quickly removed
from the windshield and the front side win‐
Operation dows.
Press the left or right side of the but‐
Switching on/off
ton: decrease or increase air flow.
The intensity is indicated by LEDs. The high‐ Press button.
est level is active when five LEDs are lit. The LED is illuminated with the sys‐
tem switched on.
The air flow from the air conditioner may be re‐
duced automatically to save battery power. The air flow can be adjusted with the air flow
active.
Controlling the air distribution If the windows are fogged over, you can also
manually switch on the air conditioning to dehumidify
the air.
Concept
The air distribution for climate control can be Rear window defroster
adjusted manually.
Press button. The LED lights up.
Operation The rear window defroster switches
off automatically after a certain period of time.
Press buttons repeatedly to select a program:
▷ Windows.
Microfilter
▷ Upper body region. In external and recirculated-air mode the mi‐
crofilter filters dust and pollen from the air.
▷ Floor area. Have this filter changed during vehicle mainte‐
nance, refer to page 207.
You may combine these programs as needed.
139
Automatic climate control
1 Seat heating, left 57 8 Remove ice and condensation

2 Air conditioning 9 Rear window defroster
3 Display 10 Automatic recirculated-air control/recircu‐
4 Temperature lated-air mode
5 Air distribution settings 11 Seat heating, right 57
6 AUTO program 12 Activated driving mode display 169
7 Maximum cooling 13 Air flow, AUTO intensity
Climate control functions in detail Temperature
Switching the system on/off Concept

The automatic climate control achieves the set
Switching on temperature as quickly as possible, if neces‐
Press any button except for the following: sary by using the maximum cooling or heating
▷ Rear window defroster. power, and then keeps it constant.
▷ Seat heating.
Settings
Switching off Turn the ring to set the desired
temperature.
Press and hold the left button until the
control switches off.
140
The selected temperature is shown on the dis‐ General information

play of the automatic climate control. The function is available above an external
The automatic climate control reaches this temperature of approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and when
temperature as quickly as possible, if needed, drive-ready state is indicated.
by increasing the cooling or heating output,
and then keeps it constant. Switching on/off
Do not rapidly switch between different tem‐ Press button.
perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli‐
mate control will not have sufficient time to ad‐
Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re‐
just the set temperature.
gion. The vents need to be open for this.
To reduce the energy consumption, the cool‐
If ECO PRO+, refer to page 169, is activated,
ing or heating output is reduced or deactivated
this function is deactivated.
as per ECO-PRO mode, refer to page 169.
The air flow can be adjusted with the air flow
Air conditioning active.
Concept AUTO program

The air in the car's interior will be cooled and
Concept
dehumidified and, depending on the tempera‐
ture setting, warmed again. Air flow, air distribution and temperature are
controlled automatically.
The car's interior can be cooled with the sta‐
tionary climate control or via the A/C button
Switching on/off
with drive-ready state activated.
Press button.
Switching on/off Depending on the selected tempera‐
Press button. ture, the intensity of the AUTO program, and
outside influences, the air is directed to the
Air conditioning is switched on or off.
windshield, side windows, upper body, and
Depending on the weather, the windshield and into the floor area.
side windows may fog up briefly when drive-
The air conditioning, refer to page 141, is
ready state is activated.
switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐
The air conditioning is switched on automati‐ gram.
cally with the AUTO program.
At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐
When using the automatic climate control, trols the program so as to prevent window
condensation water, refer to page 165, devel‐ condensation as much as possible.
ops and drains underneath the vehicle. This is
To switch off the program: press the button
normal.
again or manually adjust the air distribution.
Maximum cooling Intensity
Concept With the AUTO program activated, the auto‐

matic intensity control can be changed.
The system is set to the lowest temperature,
optimum air flow and recirculated-air mode.
141
Press the left or right side of the but‐ If the windows are fogged over, switch off the
ton: decrease or increase intensity. recirculated-air mode and press the AUTO
button to utilize the condensation sensor.
The intensity level is indicated by LEDs. Make sure that air can flow to the windshield.
Automatic recirculated-air control/ Controlling the air flow manually

recirculated-air mode
Concept
Concept
The air flow for climate control can be adjusted
The automatic recirculated-air control AUC manually.
recognizes odors or pollutants in the outside
air. The outside air supply is shut off and the General information
interior air is recirculated.
To manually adjust air flow switch off AUTO
program first.
General information
If the system is activated, a sensor detects pol‐ Operation
lutants in the outside air and controls the shut-
off automatically. Press the left or right side of the but‐
ton: decrease or increase air flow.
If the system is deactivated, outside air contin‐
uously flows into the car's interior. The intensity is indicated by LEDs. The high‐
With constant recirculated-air mode, the air est level is active when five LEDs are lit.
quality in the car's interior deteriorates and the The air flow of the automatic climate control
fogging of the windows increases. may be reduced automatically to save battery
power.
Switching on/off
Press button repeatedly to select an Controlling the air distribution
operating mode: manually
▷ LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously. Concept

▷ Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air The air distribution for climate control can be
control: a sensor detects pollutants in the adjusted manually.
outside air and shuts off automatically.
▷ Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the Operation
supply of outside air into the vehicle is per‐ Press button repeatedly to select a
manently blocked. program:
Recirculated-air mode switches off automati‐
cally at low external temperatures after a cer‐ ▷ Windows.
tain amount of time in order to avoid window ▷ Upper body region.
fogging. ▷ Floor area.
To prevent window fogging, recirculated-air ▷ Windows and upper body region.
mode switches off automatically after a certain
▷ Windows and floor area.
amount of time, depending on the environ‐
mental conditions. ▷ Upper body region and floor area.
142
▷ Windows, upper body region, and floor Ventilation

area.
The selected air distribution is shown on the
display of the automatic climate control.
If the windows are fogged over, press the
AUTO button to utilize the condensation sen‐
sor.
Defrosting windows and removing

condensation
▷ Thumbwheels for opening and closing the
Concept
vents continuously, arrows 1.
Ice and condensation are quickly removed
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction,
from the windshield and the front side win‐
arrow 2.
dows.
Switching on/off Adjusting the ventilation

Press button. ▷ Ventilation for cooling:
The LED is illuminated with the sys‐ Direct vent in your direction when vehicle's
tem switched on. interior is too hot.
For this purpose, point the side vents towards ▷ Draft-free ventilation:
the side windows as needed. Adjust the vent to let the air flow past you.
The air flow can be adjusted with the air flow

active.
Stationary climate control
If the windows are fogged over, you can also
switch on the air conditioning or press the Concept
AUTO button to utilize the condensation sen‐
Stationary climate control cools or heats the
sor.
car's interior prior to departure to a comforta‐
ble temperature.
Rear window defroster
The interior temperature is lowered with high
Press button. The LED lights up. cooling output.
The rear window defroster switches The system may heat the car's interior. Snow
off automatically after a certain period of time. and ice can be removed more easily.
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter General information

In external and recirculated-air mode the mi‐ The stationary climate control can be switched
crofilter/activated charcoal filter filters dust, on and off directly or via a pre-set departure
pollen, and gaseous pollutants out of the air. time.
Have this filter changed during vehicle mainte‐ ▷ Direct operation, refer to page 144.
nance, refer to page 207. ▷ Preselected departure times, refer to
page 144.
143
With the BMW i Remote App, refer to Climate control at departure time
page 145, the stationary climate control can
be switched on. Concept
The air automatically exits through the vents to Different departure times can be adjusted to
the windshield, the side windows, the upper ensure a comfortable interior temperature in
body region and into the floor area. the vehicle at the time of departure.
The system switches off automatically after a The activation time is automatically deter‐
certain period of time. mined based on the temperature.
If stationary climate control is used during the The system promptly switches on before the
charging process, less air conditioning ca‐ selected departure time.
pacity will be required while driving. This opti‐ The departure time is preselected in two
mizes the range. steps:
▷ Set departure times.
▷ Activate departure times.
▷ Drive-ready state is deactivated.
▷ High-voltage battery sufficiently charged Setting the departure time
or charging cable connected.
If the high-voltage battery is heavily dis‐ Using iDrive
charged, it can take some time after con‐ 1. "Settings"
necting the charging cable, until the sta‐
2. "Departure time"
tionary climate control will be functional.
3. "Departure 1:"
▷ Departure time preselected: depends on
the internal, external, and set desired tem‐ 4. "Precondition for departure time"
perature. 5. Set the desired departure time, refer to
▷ Direct operation via iDrive: does not de‐ page 182.
pend on the external temperature.
▷ The vents are open to allow air to flow out.
Activating the departure time
If a departure time is to influence the switching
Switching on/off directly on of the stationary climate control, the re‐
spective departure time must be activated first.
Concept
Using iDrive
The system can be switched on or off directly.
1. "Settings"
The system switches off automatically after a
certain period of time. 2. "Departure time"
3. "Departure 1:"
Using iDrive 4. "Precondition for departure time"
The system can be switched on or off via 5. Activate the desired departure time.
iDrive.
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
1. "Settings" trol lights up when the departure time is acti‐
2. "Climate" vated.
3. "Activate comfort climate control"
144
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐

trol flashes when the stationary climate control
has been switched on.
If drive-ready state is switched off, changes
can be made on the Control Display. Departure
time can only be changed once. Scheduled de‐
parture times are not adjusted. Settings for cli‐
mate control and charging process are also ap‐
plied for scheduled departure times.
Activating with BMW i Remote App

Using the BMW i Remote App, the system can
be directly switched on or via a preset depar‐
ture time.
145
Controls Interior equipment
Interior equipment
Vehicle features and options the safety instructions of the hand-held trans‐
mitter.◀
Compatibility
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due If this symbol is printed on the packag‐
to the selected options or country versions. ing or in the owner's manual of the sys‐
This also applies to safety-related functions tem to be controlled, the system is
and systems. When using these functions and generally compatible with the integrated Uni‐
systems, the applicable laws and regulations versal Remote Control.
must be observed. If you have any questions, please contact:
▷ A dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
Universal Integrated Remote
▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.
Control
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex
Concept Corporation.
The integrated Universal Remote Control in
the interior mirror can operate up to 3 func‐ Control elements on the interior mirror
tions of remote-controlled systems, such as
garage door drives or lighting systems. The
integrated Universal Remote Control replaces
up to 3 different hand-held transmitters. To
operate the remote control, the buttons on the
interior mirror must be programmed with the
desired functions. The hand-held transmitter
for the particular system is required in order to
program the remote control.
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored
▷ LED, arrow 1.
functions for the sake of security.
▷ Buttons, arrow 2.
Safety information ▷ The hand-held transmitter, arrow 3, is re‐
quired for programming.
WARNING
ing remote-controlled systems, e.g., the ga‐ Programming
rage door, using the integrated universal re‐
mote control. There is a risk of injury or risk of General information
property damage. Make sure that the area of 1. Switch on the ignition.
movement of the respective system is clear 2. Initial setup:
during programming and operation. Also follow
Press and hold the two outer buttons on
the interior mirror simultaneously for ap‐
146
Interior equipment Controls
proximately 20 seconds until the LED on flashing rapidly and then stays lit constantly for
the interior mirror flashes. This erases all 2 seconds, the system features a rolling code
programming of the buttons on the interior radio system. Flashing and continuous illumi‐
mirror. nation of the LED will repeat for approximately
3. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the sys‐ 20 seconds.
tem to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 in‐ For systems with a rolling code radio system,
ches/2.5 to 8 cm away from the buttons of the integrated Universal Remote Control and
the interior mirror. The required distance the system also have to be synchronized.
depends on the hand-held transmitter. Please read the owner's manual to find out
4. Simultaneously press and hold the button how to synchronize the system.
of the desired function on the hand-held Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a sec‐
transmitter and the button to be program‐ ond person.
med on the interior mirror. The LED on the
Synchronizing the universal remote control
interior mirror will begin flashing slowly.
with the system:
5. Release both buttons as soon as the LED
flashes more rapidly. The LED flashing 1. Park the vehicle within range of the re‐
faster indicates that the button on the inte‐ mote-controlled system.
rior mirror has been programmed. 2. Program the desired button on the interior
If the LED does not flash faster after at mirror as described.
least 60 seconds, change the distance be‐ 3. Locate and press the synchronizing button
tween the interior mirror and the hand-held on the system being programmed. You
transmitter and repeat the step. Several have approx. 30 seconds for the next step.
more attempts at different distances may 4. Hold down the programmed button on the
be necessary. Wait at least 15 seconds be‐ interior mirror for approximately 3 seconds
tween attempts. and then release it. If necessary, repeat this
Canada: if programming with the hand- step up to three times in order to finish
held transmitter was interrupted, hold synchronization. Once synchronization is
down the interior mirror button and repeat‐ complete, the programmed function will be
edly press and release the hand-held carried out.
transmitter button for 2 seconds.
6. To program other functions on other but‐ Reprogramming individual buttons
tons, repeat steps 3 to 5. 1. Switch on the ignition.
The systems can be controlled using the inte‐ 2. Press and hold the interior mirror button to
rior mirror buttons. be programmed.
3. As soon as the interior mirror LED starts
Special feature of the rolling code flashing slowly, hold the hand-held trans‐
wireless system mitter for the system to be controlled ap‐
If you are unable to operate the system after prox. 1 to 3 inches/2.5 to 8 cm away from
repeated programming, please check if the the buttons of the interior mirror. The re‐
system to be controlled features a rolling code quired distance depends on the hand-held
radio system. transmitter.
Read the system's owner's manual, or press
the programmed button on the interior mirror
longer. If the LED on the interior mirror starts
147
4. Likewise, press and hold the button of the hold the two outer buttons on the interior mir‐
desired function on the hand-held trans‐ ror simultaneously for approximately 20 sec‐
mitter. onds until the LED on the interior mirror
5. Release both buttons as soon as the inte‐ flashes rapidly.
rior mirror LED flashes more rapidly. The
LED flashing faster indicates that the but‐
ton on the interior mirror has been pro‐ Digital compass
grammed. The system can then be con‐
trolled by the button on the interior mirror. Overview
If the LED does not flash faster after at
most 60 seconds, change the distance and
repeat the programming starting with
step 4. Several more attempts at different
distances may be necessary. Wait at least
15 seconds between attempts.
Canada: if programming with the hand-
held transmitter was interrupted, hold
down the interior mirror button and repeat‐
edly press and release the hand-held 1 Control button
transmitter button for 2 seconds.
2 Mirror display
Operation
Mirror display
WARNING
The point of the compass is displayed in the
mirror when driving straight.
ing remote-controlled systems, e.g., the ga‐
rage door, using the integrated universal re‐
Operating concept
mote control. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of Various functions can be called up by pressing
movement of the respective system is clear the control button with a pointed object, such
during programming and operation. Also follow as the tip of a ballpoint pen or similar object.
the safety instructions of the hand-held trans‐ The following setting options are displayed in
mitter.◀ succession, depending on how long the con‐
trol button is pressed:
The system, such as the garage door, can be
▷ Pressed briefly: turns display on/off.
operated using the button on the interior mirror
while the engine is running or when the ignition ▷ 3 to 6 seconds: compass zone setting.
is started. To do this, hold down the button ▷ 6 to 9 seconds: compass calibration.
within receiving range of the system until the ▷ 9 to 12 seconds: left/right-hand steering
function is activated. The interior mirror LED setting.
stays lit while the wireless signal is being
▷ 12 to 15 seconds: language setting.
transmitted.
Setting the compass zones

Deleting stored functions
Sets the particular compass zones on the vehi‐
All stored functions will be deleted. The func‐
cle so that the compass operates correctly; re‐
tions cannot be deleted individually. Press and
fer to World map with compass zones.
148
World map with magnetic zones
Procedure Procedure
1. Press and hold the control button for ap‐ 1. Make sure that there are no large metallic
prox. 3 to 4 seconds. The number of the objects or overhead power lines near the
set compass zone appears in the mirror. vehicle and that there is sufficient room to
2. To change the zone setting, press the con‐ drive around in a circle.
trol button quickly and repeatedly until the 2. Set the currently applicable compass zone.
number of the compass zone that corre‐ 3. Press and hold the control button for ap‐
sponds with your location appears in the prox. 6 to 7 seconds so that "C" appears
mirror. on the display. Next, drive in a complete
The set zone is stored automatically. The com‐ circle at least once at a speed of no more
pass is ready for use again after approximately than 4 mph/7 km/h. If calibration is suc‐
10 seconds. cessful, the "C" is replaced by the points of
the compass.
Calibrating the digital compass
The digital compass must be calibrated in the Left/right-hand steering
event of the following: The digital compass is already set for right or
▷ The wrong compass point is displayed. left-hand steering at the factory.
▷ The point of the compass displayed does
Setting the language
not change despite changing the direction
of travel. Press and hold the control button for approx.
12 to 13 seconds. Briefly press the control
▷ Not all points of the compass are dis‐
button again to switch between English "E"
played.
and German "O".
149
Settings are stored automatically after approxi‐ handle. Make sure that children do not use the
mately 10 seconds. cigarette lighter and burn themselves.◀
NOTE
Sun visor If metal objects fall into the socket, they
can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of
Glare shield property damage. Replace the cigarette lighter
or socket cover again after using the socket.◀
Fold the sun visor down or up.
Vanity mirror Overview

A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor be‐
hind a cover. When the cover is opened, the
mirror lighting switches on.
Ashtray/cigarette lighter
Ashtray
Overview The cigarette lighter is located between the

front seats.
Push in the cigarette lighter.

The cigarette lighter can be re‐
moved as soon as it pops back
out.
The ashtray can be inserted in the cup holder.

Sockets
General information
Emptying The lighter socket can be used as a socket for
Take out the insert. electrical equipment when operating and
standby state are activated.
Cigarette lighter The total load of all sockets must not exceed
WARNING 140 watts at 12 volts.
Contact with hot heating elements or the Do not damage the socket by using non-com‐
hot socket of the cigarette lighter can cause patible connectors.
burns. Flammable materials can ignite if the
cigarette lighter falls down or is held against
the respective objects. There is a risk of fire
and injuries. Hold the cigarette lighter by its
150
Safety information Between the front seats

WARNING
Devices and cables in the unfolding area
of the airbags, for instance portable navigation
devices, can hinder the unfolding of the airbag
or be thrown around in the car's interior when
unfolding. There is a risk of injury. Make sure
that devices and cables are not in the airbag's
area of unfolding.◀
NOTE The socket is located between the front seats.

Battery chargers for the vehicle battery Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.
can work with high voltages and currents,
which means that the 12 volt on-board net‐
work can be overloaded or damaged. There is
In the cargo area
a risk of property damage. Only connect bat‐
tery chargers for the vehicle battery to the
starting aid terminals in the engine compart‐
ment.◀
NOTE
If metal objects fall into the socket, they
can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of
property damage. Replace the cigarette lighter
or socket cover again after using the socket.◀ The socket is located on the right side in the
cargo area. Remove the cover.
Front center console
USB interface/AUX-IN port

Concept
Mobile devices with USB port can be con‐
nected to the USB interface.
A mobile audio device, for instance a MP3
player, can be connected using the AUX-IN
port.
The socket is located underneath the instru‐
ment panel. Remove the cover.
General information
The following devices can be connected:
▷ Mobile phones supported by the USB in‐
terface.
▷ Audio devices with USB port, e.g., MP3
player.
151
▷ USB storage devices. temperatures; refer to the owner's manual

Common file systems are supported. of the device.
FAT32 and exFAT are the recommended ▷ Due to the many different compression
formats. techniques, proper playback of the media
Information about compatible USB media can stored on the USB storage device cannot
be found at www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth. be guaranteed in all cases.
The following applications are possible: ▷ A connected USB storage device will be
supplied with charging current via the USB
▷ Exporting and importing driver profiles, re‐
interface if the device supports this. At
fer to page 46.
higher temperatures, the USB storage de‐
▷ Playing music files via USB audio. vice may cause a reduction in the charging
▷ Adding music files to the music collection current.
and saving the music collection. ▷ To ensure proper transmission of the
▷ Playing videos via USB video. stored data, do not charge a USB storage
▷ Loading of software updates. device via the onboard socket, when it is
connected to the USB interface.
Overview ▷ Depending on how the USB storage device
is being used, settings may be required on
the USB storage device, refer to the own‐
er's manual of the device.
Non-compatible USB media:
▷ USB hard drives.
▷ USB hubs.
▷ USB memory card readers with multiple in‐
serts.
▷ HFS-formatted USB media.
The USB interface and the AUX-IN port are lo‐
cated between the front seats. ▷ MTP devices.
▷ Devices such as fans or lamps.
Connecting an external device
Observe the following when connecting:
Cargo area
▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐
nector into the USB interface. Cargo cover
▷ Use a flexible adapter cable.
▷ Protect the USB storage device against General information
mechanical damage. The cargo cover is raised when the tailgate is
opened.
▷ Due to the large number of USB media
available on the market, it cannot be guar‐
anteed that every device is operable on the
vehicle.
▷ Do not expose USB media to extreme envi‐
ronmental conditions, such as very high
152
Safety information Safety information

WARNING WARNING
Loose objects or devices with a cable Danger of jamming with folding down the
connection to the vehicle, e.g., mobile phones, backrests. There is a risk of injury or risk of
can be thrown into the vehicle's interior while property damage. Make sure that the area of
driving, e.g., in the event of an accident or dur‐ movement of the rear backrest and the of the
ing braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a head restraint is clear prior to folding down.◀
risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices
with a cable connection to the vehicle in the WARNING
vehicle's interior.◀ With an unlocked backrest, an unsecured
load can be thrown into the vehicle's interior,
Removing e.g., in case of an accident, braking or evasive
maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Make sure
1. Detach the retaining straps at the tailgate.
that the backrest engages into the locking af‐
2. Raise the cover and pull it back to remove. ter folding it back.◀
WARNING
Unexpected movements of the backrest
while driving may occur due to unintentional
unlocking of the rear backrests by the straps.
There is a risk of injury. Do not fasten any ob‐
jects to the straps for unlocking the rear back‐
rests.◀
WARNING
The stability of the child restraint system
Installing
1. Place the cover in the brackets. adjustment or improper installation of the child
2. Attach the retaining straps. seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Enlarging the cargo area securely against the backrest. If possible, ad‐
just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests
Concept and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that
The cargo area can be enlarged by folding seats and backrests are securely engaged. If
down the rear seat backrest or moving it into possible, adjust the height of the head re‐
the cargo position. straints or remove them.◀
NOTE
General information
Vehicle parts can be damaged when
The rear seat backrest is divided at a ratio of
folding down the rear backrest. There is a risk
50 to 50.
of property damage. Make sure that the area of
The rear seat backrests can be folded down movement of the rear backrest including head
from the rear or from the cargo area. restraint is clear when folding down.◀
153
Folding down the rear seat backrest Cargo position

from the rear
1. Insert the belt into the buckle. Concept
The rear seat backrests can be separately
moved through two different stages into an up‐
right loading position.
Settings
1. Pull the strap.
2. Pull the strap forward.
2. Set the loading position of the rear seat

backrest as required.
3. Latch the rear seat backrest. The red mark
on the front strap disappears.
3. Fold the rear seat backrest forward.
Folding down the rear seat backrest

from the cargo area
1. Pull corresponding strap.
2. Fold the rear seat backrest forward.
154
Fold back the backrest

1. Insert the belt into the buckle.
2. Pull the strap.
3. Fold the rear seat backrest rearward. The

rear seat backrest first engages in the
loading position.
4. Pull the strap again.
5. Fold rear seat backrest all the way back.
6. Latch the rear seat backrest. The red mark
on the front strap disappears.
155
Controls Storage compartments
Storage compartments
Vehicle features and options ▷ Storage compartments in the cargo area,
refer to page 159.
Glove compartment
Front passenger side
Safety information
must be observed. WARNING
Folded open, the glove compartment
protrudes in the vehicle's interior. Objects in
Safety information the glove compartment can be thrown into the
vehicle's interior while driving, e.g., in the event
WARNING
of an accident or during braking and evasive
Loose objects or devices with a cable maneuvers. There is a risk of injury. Always
connection to the vehicle, e.g., mobile phones, close the glove compartment immediately after
can be thrown into the vehicle's interior while using it.◀
driving, e.g., in the event of an accident or dur‐
ing braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a
Opening
with a cable connection to the vehicle in the
vehicle's interior.◀
NOTE
Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can
damage the dashboard. There is a risk of prop‐
erty damage. Do not use anti-slip pads.◀
Storage compartments Press button and open cover upward.
The following storage compartments are avail‐

able in the car's interior: Closing
▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger Fold cover closed.
side, refer to page 156.
▷ Between the front seats, refer to
page 157.
▷ Compartments in the front doors, refer to
page 158.
▷ Rear seat, refer to page 158.
156
Storage compartments Controls
Between the front seats Overview
Center armrest
Open/tilt
A storage compartment is located in the center
armrest between the seats.
Between the seats.
Receptacle for cup holder
To open, press button, arrow 1.

To open, press button, arrow 2.
Front cup holder
Safety information
There is a receptacle for the cup holder be‐
WARNING
tween the seats.
Unsuitable containers in the cup holder
and hot beverages can damage the cup holder
and increase the risk of injury in the event of an
accident. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Use light-weight, unbreaka‐
ble, and sealable containers. Do not transport
hot beverages. Do not force objects into the
cup holder.◀
There are three receptacles for the cup holder

between the seats.
157
Controls Storage compartments
Connection for an external audio Rear seat

device
Rear cup holder
Safety information
WARNING
Unsuitable containers in the cup holder
and hot beverages can damage the cup holder
and increase the risk of injury in the event of an
accident. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Use light-weight, unbreaka‐
An external audio device, for instance an MP3 ble, and sealable containers. Do not transport
player, can be connected via the AUX-IN port hot beverages. Do not force objects into the
or the USB audio interface between the seats. cup holder.◀
Storage compartment Overview
There is a storage compartment between the Between the seats.

seats.
Clothes hooks
Compartments in the doors
Safety information
WARNING
WARNING
Breakable objects, e.g., glass bottles, can
break in the event of an accident. Broken glass Clothing articles on the clothes hooks
can be scattered in the vehicle's interior. There can obstruct the view while driving. There is a
is a risk of injury. Do not stow any breakable risk of an accident. When suspending clothing
objects in the vehicle's interior.◀ articles from the hooks, ensure that they will
not obstruct the driver's view.◀
WARNING
Improper use of the clothes hooks can
lead to a risk of objects flying about during
braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk
of injury and risk of property damage. Only
158
Storage compartments Controls
hang lightweight objects, e.g., clothing articles,

from the clothes hooks.◀
General information
Two folding clothes hooks are provided in the
rear of the vehicle. To unfold them, press on
the top edge of the clothes hooks.
Storage compartments in the

cargo area
Retaining strap
A retaining strap is available on the right and
left side trim for fastening small objects.
Lashing eyes in the cargo area

To secure the cargo, refer to page 167, there
are four lashing eyes in the cargo area.
159
Driving tips
This chapter provides you with information
useful in dealing with specific driving and
operating modes.

Driving tips Things to remember when driving
Things to remember when driving

Vehicle features and options Tires
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐
ing circumstances when tires are brand-new;
they achieve their full traction potential after a
break-in time.
to the selected options or country versions. Drive conservatively for the first
This also applies to safety-related functions 200 miles/300 km.
systems, the applicable laws and regulations Brake system
must be observed. Brake discs and brake pads only reach their full
effectiveness after approx. 300 miles/500 km.
Drive moderately during this break-in period.
Breaking-in period
Following part replacement
General information The same break-in procedures should be ob‐
Moving parts need to begin working together served if any of the components above-men‐
smoothly. tioned have to be renewed in the course of the
The following instructions will help you to ach‐ vehicle's operating life.
ieve a long vehicle life and good efficiency.
Safety information Using eDRIVE efficiently

WARNING Concept
Due to new parts and components, eDRIVE operates automatically. Proactive driv‐
safety and driver assistance systems can react ing utilizes energy consumption and energy re‐
with a delay. There is a risk of an accident. Af‐ covery optimally. Energy recovery is used to
ter installing new parts or with a new vehicle, charge the high-voltage battery. It is important
drive conservatively and intervene early if nec‐ for the supply of electrical components and
essary. Observe the break-in procedures of thus a prerequisite for an extensive range. En‐
the respective parts and components.◀ ergy consumption and recovery depend very
much, among other things, on your driving
Range Extender style.
The full performance of the Range Extender is
available after a brief operating period and is Optimizing driving style
only minimally restricted during the run-in
phase. Performance display
Control of the Range Extender during and after The driving style can be optimized using the
the run-in phase, as well as the activation of performance display.
the full performance, are preset depending on
the system and take place automatically.
162
Things to remember when driving Driving tips
essary, the high-voltage battery will be

charged automatically. Make sure that the
charging process takes place. Regularly check
the charge state.
Do not allow the vehicle to sit idle for longer
than four weeks with a charge state below ap‐
prox. 80 %.◀
The energy recovery occurs during coasting

General driving notes
and braking and is displayed in the perform‐
ance display by the accelerator pedal indicator.
Closing the tailgate
The accelerator pedal pointer is within the
CHARGE range. Safety information
Efficient energy recovery: WARNING
▷ The accelerator pedal moves to the left An open tailgate protrudes from the vehi‐
within the blue range of the CHARGE dis‐ cle and can endanger occupants and other
play, arrow 1. traffic participants or damage the vehicle in the
▷ The energy use while driving can be opti‐ event of an accident, braking or evasive ma‐
mized by efficient acceleration. neuvers. In addition, exhaust fumes may enter
Efficient acceleration: the car's interior. There is a risk of injury or risk
of damage to property. Do not drive with the
▷ The accelerator pedal moves to the right
tailgate open.◀
within the blue range of the ePOWER dis‐
play, arrow 2.
Driving with the tailgate open
▷ Use deceleration during coasting as often
as possible for energy recovery. If driving with the tailgate open cannot be
avoided:
▷ Close all windows and the glass sunroof.
Discharge of the high-voltage battery
▷ Greatly increase the air flow from the vents.
General information ▷ Drive moderately.
Longer idle periods, refer to page 224, can re‐
duce the charge state of the high-voltage bat‐ Hot exhaust system
tery. WARNING
During driving operation, high tempera‐
Safety information
tures can occur underneath the vehicle body,
NOTE e.g., caused by the exhaust gas system. If
The high-voltage battery can be dam‐ combustible materials, such as leaves or grass,
aged by excessive discharge. There is a risk of come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust
property damage. Before storing the vehicle gas system, these materials can ignite. There
for an extended period, ensure that the high- is a risk of injury or risk of property damage. Do
voltage battery is fully charged. During the idle not remove the heat shields installed and never
period, connect the vehicle to a charging sta‐ apply undercoating to them. Make sure that no
tion at a compatible charging location. If nec‐ combustible materials can come in contact
163
Driving tips Things to remember when driving
with hot vehicle parts in driving operation, idle age. When driving through water, do not ex‐
or during parking. Do not touch the hot ex‐ ceed the maximum indicated water level and
haust system.◀ the maximum speed for driving through wa‐
ter.◀
Mobile communication devices in the
vehicle Braking safely
WARNING The vehicle is equipped with ABS as a stand‐
ard feature.
Vehicle electronics and mobile phones
can influence one another. There is radiation Perform an emergency stop in situations that
due to the transmission operations of mobile require such.
phones. There is a risk of injury or risk of prop‐ Steering is still responsive. You can still avoid
erty damage. If possible, in the vehicle's inte‐ any obstacles with a minimum of steering ef‐
rior use only mobile phones with direct con‐ fort.
nections to an exterior antenna in order to Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from
exclude mutual interference and deflect the ra‐ the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its
diation from the vehicle's interior.◀ active mode.
In certain situations, for instance when coast‐
Hydroplaning ing, the accelerator pedal can be used for de‐
On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can celerating, refer to page 71.
form between the tires and road surface. In certain braking situations, the perforated
This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan‐ brake discs can emit functional noises. Func‐
ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete tional noises have no effect on the perform‐
loss of contact between the tires and the road ance and operational reliability of the brake.
surface, ultimately undermining your ability to
steer and brake the vehicle. Objects in the movement area around
pedals and floor area
Driving through water
WARNING
General information Objects in the driver's floor area can limit
the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal.
When driving through water, observe the fol‐
There is a risk of an accident. Stow objects in
lowing:
the vehicle such that they are secured and
▷ Drive through calm water only. cannot enter into the driver's floor area. Use
▷ Drive through water only if it is not deeper floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and
than maximum 9.8 in/25 cm. can be safely attached to the floor. Do not use
▷ Drive through water no faster than walking loose floor mats and do not layer several floor
speed, up to 3 mph/5 km/h. mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clear‐
ance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats
Safety information are securely fastened again after they were re‐
moved, for instance for cleaning.◀
NOTE
When driving too quickly through too
deep water, water can enter into the engine
compartment, the electrical system or the
transmission. There is a risk of property dam‐
164
Things to remember when driving Driving tips
Hills Driving on racetracks

General information Higher mechanical and thermal loads during
racetrack operation lead to increased wear.
On downhill sections, use energy recovery if
This wear is not covered by the warranty. The
possible to decelerate the vehicle.
vehicle is not designed for use in motor sports
competition.
Safety information
WARNING
Light but consistent brake pressure can
lead to high temperatures, brakes wearing out
and possibly even brake failure. There is a risk
of an accident. Avoid placing excessive stress
on the brake system.◀
WARNING
In idle state or with drive-ready state
switched off, safety-relevant functions, for in‐
stance engine braking effect, braking force
boost and steering assistance, are restricted or
not available at all. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. Do not drive in idle state or with drive-
ready state switched off.◀
Brake disc corrosion

Corrosion on the brake discs and contamina‐
tion on the brake pads are increased by the fol‐
lowing circumstances:
▷ Low mileage.
▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not
used at all.
▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.
▷ Aggressive, acidic, or alkaline cleaning
agents.
Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will cause
a pulsating effect on the brakes in their re‐
sponse - generally this cannot be corrected.
Condensation water under the parked

vehicle
When using the automatic climate control,
condensation water develops and collects un‐
derneath the vehicle.
165
Driving tips Loading
Loading
Vehicle features and options WARNING
Improperly stowed objects can shift and
be thrown into the vehicle's interior, e.g., in the
event of an accident or during braking and eva‐
sive maneuvers. Vehicle occupants can be hit
and injured. There is a risk of injury. Stow and
secure objects and cargo properly.◀
and systems. When using these functions and NOTE
Fluids in the cargo area can cause dam‐
must be observed.
age. There is a risk of property damage. Make
sure that no fluids leak in the cargo area.◀
Safety information NOTE

WARNING When the cargo floor panel is not in‐
serted, there can be damage to the engine
High gross weight can overheat the tires,
cover when loading the cargo area. There is a
damage them internally and cause a sudden
risk of property damage. Only load the cargo
drop in tire inflation pressure. Driving charac‐
area if the cargo floor panel is inserted.◀
teristics may be negatively impacted, reducing
lane stability, lengthening the braking distan‐
ces and changing the steering response.
There is a risk of an accident. Pay attention to Steps for Determining
the permitted load capacity of the tires and Correct Load Limit
never exceed the permitted gross weight.◀
1. Locate the statement “The combined
WARNING weight of occupants and cargo should
Loose objects or devices with a cable never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
connection to the vehicle, e.g., mobile phones, vehicle’s placard.
can be thrown into the vehicle's interior while 2. Determine the combined weight of the
driving, e.g., in the event of an accident or dur‐ driver and passengers that will be riding in
ing braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
with a cable connection to the vehicle in the
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
vehicle's interior.◀
4. The resulting figure equals the available
WARNING amount of cargo and luggage load ca‐
Unexpected movements of the backrest pacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount
while driving may occur due to unintentional equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five
unlocking of the rear backrests by the straps. 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the
There is a risk of injury. Do not fasten any ob‐ amount of available cargo and luggage load
jects to the straps for unlocking the rear back‐ capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400–750 (5 x 150) =
rests.◀ 650 lbs.)
166
Loading Driving tips
5. Determine the combined weight of lug‐ ▷ Smaller and light cargo: secure with
gage and cargo being loaded on the vehi‐ ratchet straps or draw straps.
cle. That weight may not safely exceed the ▷ Larger and heavy cargo: secure with cargo
available cargo and luggage load capacity straps.
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to your Lashing eyes in the cargo
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine
area
how this reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Load
There are four lashing eyes in the cargo area

for securing cargo.
Attach load securing aids, such as lashing
straps, retaining straps, draw straps or cargo
nets, to the lashing eyes in the cargo area.
The maximum load is the sum of the weight of
the occupants and the cargo.
The greater the weight of the occupants, the
less cargo that can be transported.
Stowing and securing cargo

▷ Do not exceed permissible rear axle load.
▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the
cargo.
▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possi‐
ble, directly behind and at the bottom of
the rear passenger seat backrests.
▷ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not
occupied, secure each of the safety belts in
the opposite buckle.
▷ If necessary, fold down the rear backrests
to stow cargo.
▷ Do not stack cargo above the top edge of
the backrests.
167
Driving tips Increasing the range
Increasing the range

General information Check the tire inflation pressure
regularly
The vehicle contains comprehensive technolo‐
Check and, if needed, correct the tire inflation
gies for reducing the energy consumption and
pressure at least twice a month and before
for maximizing the range.
starting on a long trip.
The range depends on a number of different
Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐
factors.
sistance and thus raises energy consumption
The implementation of certain measures, driv‐ and tire wear.
ing style and regular maintenance can increas‐
ing the range and thereby also reduce the en‐
vironmental impact.
Stationary climate control
Run advance climate control, refer to
Remove unnecessary cargo page 143, in the vehicle during charging if pos‐
sible before driving off.
Additional weight reduces the range.
Heating and cooling operations are very en‐
ergy intensive and substantially reduce the
electric range.
Remove attached parts
following use
Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero‐ Look well ahead when
dynamics and increase the energy consump‐ driving
tion.
Driving smoothly and proactively reduces en‐
ergy consumption.
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
Close the windows and glass
sunroof By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehi‐
cle driving ahead of you.
Driving with the glass sunroof and windows
Longer braking procedures result in more effi‐
open results in increased air resistance and
cient charging of the high-voltage battery via
thereby reduces the range.
energy recovery from braking.
Tires Use accelerator pedal for

General information deceleration and coasting
Tires can affect energy consumption in various When approaching a red light, use accelerator
ways, e.g., energy consumption can be influ‐ pedal for decelerating.
enced by tire size. For going downhill use coasting function; for
this purpose, press accelerator pedal just
enough that the vehicle rolls.
168
Increasing the range Driving tips
Switch off any functions that ECO PRO

are not currently needed ▷ Reduction of the heating output and
switch-on duration for exterior mirror, rear
Functions such as the rear window defroster window, and seat heating.
require a lot of energy and reduce the range,
▷ Reduction of the cooling or heating output
especially in city and stop-and-go traffic.
of the air conditioner.
Switch off these functions if they are not
▷ The speed is limited to an adjustable maxi‐
needed.
mum value between 50 mph/80 km/h and
The ECO PRO and ECO PRO+ driving pro‐ 80 mph/130 km/h. To intentionally exceed
grams support the energy-conserving use of the speed limit, press the accelerator pedal
comfort features. They automatically perform a all the way down.
partial or complete deactivation of these func‐
tions. ECO PRO+
The cooling and heating output of the air con‐
ditioner are additionally deactivated on ECO
Have maintenance carried PRO+ activation.
out The low beams are dimmed.
Have the vehicle maintained regularly to ach‐ The maximum speed is limited to
ieve optimal vehicle efficiency and service life. 55 mph/90 km/h. In special situations, the
BMW recommends that maintenance work be speed limit can be consciously exceeded by
performed by a BMW dealer’s service center. applying the accelerator pedal.
For information on the BMW Maintenance
System, refer to page 207. Activating ECO PRO and ECO PRO+
Press the button repeatedly, until ECO
PRO or ECO PRO+ is displayed in the
ECO PRO and ECO PRO+ instrument cluster.
Concept
Configuring ECO PRO
ECO PRO and ECO PRO+ support an efficient
driving style. To this end, the control of the
Via the Driving Dynamics Control
drive is optimized for moderate acceleration,
and adapted to lighting and comfort features, 1. Activate ECO PRO.
such as climate control output. Some vehicle 2. "Configure ECO PRO"
functions cannot be used during activated
driving mode ECO PRO and ECO PRO+. Using iDrive
In addition, context-sensitive instructions can 1. "Settings"
be displayed that assist in driving efficiently. 2. If necessary, "Driving mode"
3. "Configure ECO PRO"
General information
With ECO PRO and ECO PRO+, different set‐ ECO PRO limit
tings are made in the respective mode.
▷ "ECO PRO speed warning":
The output is reduced once the set ECO
PRO speed is reached.
169
Driving tips Increasing the range
An ECO PRO tip is displayed if the speed Mark in the ePOWER area, arrow 2: display
of the set ECO PRO limit is exceeded. when accelerating.
▷ "Limit at:": Your driving style's efficiency is shown by the
Set the desired ECO PRO speed. bar's color:
▷ Blue display: efficient driving style as long
ECO PRO climate control as the mark moves within the blue range.
To activate ECO PRO climate control: ▷ Gray display: adjust driving style, for in‐
"ECO PRO climate control" stance by reduced acceleration.
Climate control is set to be fuel-efficient. The display turns blue as soon as all conditions
for driving with optimized fuel efficiency are
That is, it is possible to deviate slightly from
met.
the set temperature or to heat or cool the car's
interior more slowly, to economize on fuel con‐
sumption. ECO PRO Tip
Coasting Driving tip

To activate coasting: As soon as one of the conditions for efficient
"Coasting" driving is no longer fulfilled, respective driving
tips are displayed as a symbol in the instru‐
With little pressure on the accelerator pedal, ment cluster.
the vehicle can coast without energy recovery.
The accelerator pedal indicator in the instru‐ Symbols
ment display is centered between CHARGE
and ePOWER during coasting. An additional symbol and a SMS text message
are displayed on the control display.
ECO PRO potential savings Symbol Measure
Shows potential savings with the current set‐
For efficient driving back off the ac‐
tings in percentages.
celerator or delay accelerating to al‐
low time to assess road conditions.
Display in the instrument cluster
Reduce speed to the selected ECO
ECO PRO efficiency display PRO speed.
Activating the ECO PRO efficiency

display and ECO PRO tips
The ECO PRO efficiency display and ECO
PRO tips in the instrument cluster appear
when the ECO PRO display is activated.
Activating the display via iDrive:
1. "Settings"
A mark in the performance display informs
2. "Instrument cluster"
about the current driving style.
3. "ECO PRO Info"
Mark in the CHARGE range, arrow 1: indication
for energy recovery and braking.
170
Increasing the range Driving tips
Indications on the Control Display Calling up ECO PRO driving style

analysis
eDRIVE 1. Activate ECO PRO.
Information on fuel consumption and technol‐ 2. "eDRIVE"
ogy can be displayed while driving.
3. Select the symbol.
Using iDrive:
1. "Vehicle info" Display on the Control Display
2. "eDRIVE"
Displaying ECO PRO Tips

ECO PRO Tips can be displayed while driving
as a note in the split screen in the energy flow
display.
Display ECO PRO Tips via iDrive:
1. "Vehicle info"
2. "eDRIVE" The display of the ECO PRO driving style anal‐
3. "ECO PRO tips" ysis consists of a symbolized route and a
lookup table.
used. The road symbolizes the efficiency of the driv‐
ing style. The more efficient the driving style,
Driving style analysis the smoother the depicted route becomes, ar‐
row 1.
Concept The table of values contains stars, arrow 2.
In this situation, the function helps develop an The more efficient the driving style, the more
especially efficient driving style and to save en‐ stars are displayed in the table.
ergy. If, on the other hand, the driving style is ineffi‐
For this purpose, the driving style is analyzed. cient, a more wavy road and a reduced number
The assessment is done in various categories of stars are displayed.
and is displayed on the Control Display. To assist with an efficient driving style, ECO
This display will help you adjust your driving PRO tips are displayed during driving.
style and save some energy. Tips for an energy-saving driving style, In‐
The last 15 minutes of a trip are evaluated. creasing the range, refer to page 168.
The range of the vehicle can be extended by

adopting an efficient driving style.
The function is only available in ECO PRO
mode.
171
Mobility
In order to always ensure your mobility, you will
find important information on operating fluids,
wheels and tires, maintenance and Roadside
Assistance in the following.

Mobility Charging the vehicle
Charging the vehicle

Vehicle features and options ▷ Charging via a DC charging station.
Level 1 charging is possible via a household
socket with a voltage of 120 volts.
series. It also describes features that are not For optimal use of the energy from the power
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due grid, charging at a Level 2 charging station,
to the selected options or country versions. such as BMW i Wallbox, is recommended.
and systems. When using these functions and Charge current
must be observed. General information
The charge current strength is indicated in am‐
peres.
Concept The vehicle cannot automatically detect the
The vehicle can be charged using various maximum permissible charge current strength
charging cables at charging stations or house‐ of the power grid during charging via a house‐
hold sockets. Control and monitoring of the hold socket or charging station.
charging process are handled completely au‐
tomatically. The charge current strength can Level 1 charging
be adjusted via iDrive. Prior to the first Level 1 charging at your own
household socket, as well as when charging at
external electrical power sockets in Level 1,
General information the allowed charge current strength must be
determined, for instance by a qualified electri‐
High-voltage battery cian.
The high-voltage battery is used as an energy The charge current strength for Level 1 charg‐
accumulator. The high-voltage battery can be ing, refer to page 181, can be adjusted in the
charged by energy recovery during the trip or vehicle in three levels.
via the power grid. At delivery, the charge current for
In order to operate the high-voltage battery Level 1 charging is set to the lowest level.
optimally, charge the vehicle regularly and Depending on the country-specific version,
completely on a compatible charger. one of several ampere ratings is printed on the
When charging via the power grid, you can Level 1 charging cable. This ampere rating is
chose between the following variants. the limit which must be adhered to for the vehi‐
cle if the charge current is set to the highest
▷ Level 1 charging via a household socket.
level. Depending on the charging cable, the
▷ Level 2 charging via a Level 2 charging sta‐ change in charge current strength varies when
tion. lower levels are set.
174
Charging the vehicle Mobility
Overview
Print on charging cable Charge current setting
"Maximum" "Reduced" "Low"
8A 8A 6A 6A
10 A 10 A 7.5 A 6A
12 A 12 A 9A 6A
15 A 15 A 11.25 A 7.5 A
Charging at a Level 2 charging station Safety information

The permitted charge current strength must
WARNING
be determined prior to charging at a
Level 2 charging station, for instance from the Improper working with electrical current
operator of the Level 2 charging station. The can lead to an electric shock due to high vol‐
permitted charge current strength can vary by tages or high currents. There is a risk of fire or
country. danger to life. Observe the general safety reg‐
ulations when working with electrical current.◀
The charge current strength for Level 2 charg‐
ing, refer to page 181, can be adjusted in the WARNING
vehicle in two steps.
A faulty and incorrectly designed charg‐
At delivery, the charge current for ing device at the charging location can cause
Level 2 charging is set to "Reduced". Maintain damage to the vehicle and overload the power
this setting unless it was verified that a higher mains at the charging location. There is a risk
charge current strength is permitted in the in‐ of fire and a risk of injury.
dividual case.
The maximum charge current changes de‐ that, prior to your first use of a charging loca‐
pending on the setting. tion, you have the compatibility of the following
"Maximum" "Reduced" components confirmed:
▷ Charging cable.
32 A 16 A
▷ Charging station.
▷ Household socket and connected cir‐
Depending on the set charge current, the
cuits.◀
charging duration changes.
WARNING
Range Extender Damaged or worn charging devices, e.g.,
With Range Extender, refer to page 72, worn contacts, can heat up. There is a risk of
switched on, the current charge state can be fire. Only use charging devices in proper
maintained. In this way, a higher range is ach‐ state.◀
ieved.
175
WARNING cable only for charging the vehicle, and do not

If a sufficient safety distance from easily extend it using cables or adapters.◀
flammable materials is not maintained, simulta‐
WARNING
neous charging and filling with fuel can cause a
risk of fire. There is a risk of injury or risk of Damaged charging cables can heat up or
property damage. Do not fill the vehicle with lead to an electric shock. There is a risk of fire
fuel and charge it simultaneously.◀ or a risk of injury. Use undamaged charging ca‐
bles only.◀
WARNING
Contact with live components can lead to Level 1 charging cable
an electric shock. High voltage is applied at the The vehicle is supplied with a Level 1 charging
charging connection. There is a risk of injury or cable.
danger to life.
With the Level 1 charging cable, it is permissi‐
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends ble to perform charging from grounded house‐
that work on the charging connection, e.g., hold sockets. At the power connection of a
cleaning, be performed only by an authorized household socket, charging is done with alter‐
BMW i dealer's service center or another quali‐ nating current.
fied service center or repair shop.◀
When a Level 1 charging cable is used, this
may produce efficiency values other than indi‐
cated on the energy label.
Charging cable
Level 2 charging cable
General information The Level 2 charging cable makes it possible
Use a Level 1 charging cable, Level 2 charging to quickly recharge at sockets of designated
cable or the permanently installed charging ca‐ Level 2 charging stations using a special plug.
ble of a charging station to charge the vehicle. Charging is performed with alternating current
Different charging cables can be required de‐ at designated Level 2 charging stations. The
pending on the country. charging process can be completed faster than
at household sockets.
Safety information If necessary, the charging cable is attached to
WARNING the charging station.
Non-compatible charging cables or un‐ If a level 2 charging cable is used, apply the
suitable charging stations can heat up and corresponding setting via iDrive, refer to
cause damage to the vehicle. There is a risk of page 181.
fire. Use charging cables or charging stations
for charging that are suitable for the respective DC charging cable
vehicle type. The DC charging cable that is permanently in‐
A dealer's service center will be glad to provide stalled at the charging station makes is possi‐
information about suitable charging cables.◀ ble to charge at DC charging stations. Charg‐
ing is performed with direct current at
WARNING designated DC charging stations. At the higher
Improper use of the charging cable can capacity current connection of a DC charger
prevent charging and lead to damage, e.g., ca‐ station the charging time is significantly lower
ble fire. There is a risk of fire. Use the charging
176
than with a household socket or a level 2 Connecting

charging station.
During charging at a DC charging station, an Connecting the charging cable
indication in the instrument cluster, refer to To connect, engage selector lever position P,
page 181, is displayed. deactivate drive-ready state, and unlock the
The DC charging cable is also referred to as vehicle. Set the parking brake, if needed.
Level 3 DC charging cable. 1. Tap on the charging socket flap, arrow.
Storage
The Level 1 charging cable is located in the ca‐
ble compartment under the hood.
The Level 2 charging cable can be stored in
the same place.
Moisture can penetrate into the occasional use
cable compartment, for instance in a vehicle
wash.
If required, store the charging cable with the 2. Remove the charging socket lid, arrow.
installed plug cover to prevent moisture in the
charging cable plug.
3. Remove cover of the charging cable plug, if

needed.
4. Connect Level 1 charging cable to the
household socket or Level 2 charging ca‐
ble to the port on the charging station.
5. Insert the charging cable plug correspond‐
ing to the charging socket, and push it in
until it engages.
When charging at a charging station, follow the
instructions at the charging station.
Remove
When the charging process is active and the
vehicle is locked, the charging cable is locked.
Unlock the vehicle before removing the cable.
When the charging process is completed, the
charging cable is automatically unlocked.
177
If necessary, clean the area between charging Manual release

socket flap and charging socket, for instance
from snow, before removing it. General information
1. Unlock the vehicle by remote control if it is The charging socket flap is automatically
locked. locked while driving.
Charging cable is unlocked. The charging cable may be locked during the
2. Press the release button on the handle, ar‐ charging process if the vehicle is locked.
row 1, and grasp the charging cable at the
gripping areas. Manually unlocking the charging
socket flap
Charging process is interrupted.
In case of an electrical malfunction of the
charging cable lock, the charging socket flap
can be manually unlocked.
1. Open the front door on the side of the

charging socket flap.
2. Open rear door on the side of the charging
socket flap.
3. Remove the cover.
4. Pull the upper blue knob. This releases
3. Remove the charging cable from the the charging socket flap.
charging socket, arrow 2.
4. Put the charging socket lid back on.
5. Close the charging socket flap.
6. Attach cover of the charging cable plug, if
needed.
7. Disconnect Level 1 charging cable from
the household socket or Level 2 charging
cable from the port on the charging station
as needed.
8. Stow the charging cable. 5. If necessary, press the knob back into the
initial position.
At a charging station, insert the perma‐
nently installed charging cable in the place
Manually unlocking the charging cable
provided for it.
In case of an electrical malfunction, the charg‐
Always keep charging socket clean and
ing cable can be manually unlocked.
unobstructed.
When charging at a charging station, complete
Keep the charging socket flap closed when
the charging process at the charging station
the charging socket is not used.
before unlocking the charging cable.
1. Open the front door on the side of the

charging socket flap.
2. Open rear door on the side of the charging
socket flap.
178
3. Remove the cover. Starting the charging process

4. Pull the lower blue knob. 1. Engage selector lever position P. Set the
Charging cable is manually unlocked. parking brake, if needed.
2. Planning the charging process, refer to
page 180.
3. Switch off drive-ready state.
4. Connect Level 1 charging cable to the
household socket or Level 2 charging ca‐
ble to the port on the charging station.
5. Open charging socket flap.
6. Connect charging cable to the vehicle, re‐
fer to page 177.
5. Removing the charging cable, refer to
7. Lock vehicle if it is unlocked.
page 177.
At high temperatures, the high-voltage battery
6. If necessary, press the knob back into the
is initially cooled. There may be a delay before
initial position.
charging starts. If the high-voltage battery is
Have the locking system of the charging discharged, cooling of the high-voltage battery
socket checked at the dealer’s service center may not be possible. The charging process
or another qualified service center or repair cannot be started.
shop after manual unlocking of the charging
The charging process may take longer under
cable.
extremely low or high temperatures.
Display of the charging status

Charging process
Indicator light on the charging socket
Safety information
WARNING
Improper use of the power mains con‐
nection can lead to damage, e.g., cable fire.
There is a risk of injury or risk of property dam‐
age. Use the charging cable only for charging
the vehicle, and do not extend it using cables
or adapters.◀
WARNING
An indicator light is located on the charging
If the charge current strength is adjusted
socket.
incorrectly, the power mains of the household
socket can be overloaded and overheat. There
is a risk of fire. Adjust the charge current
strength to the power mains prior to charging
on household sockets. With unknown power
networks, set on the lowest level.◀
179
Charging status ▷ Immediate charging.

▷ Set time window for favorable charging.
Light Charging status
▷ Set the charge current for charging via a
White Charging cable can be con‐ Level 1 charging cable.
nected or removed. ▷ Set the charge current for charging via a
Level 2 charging cable.
Flashes Charging process is being pre‐
yellow pared. If drive-ready state is switched off, changes
can be made via iDrive. Departure time can
For DC charging: DC charging
only be changed once. Scheduled departure
is finishing.
times are not adjusted. Settings for stationary
Blue The charging process starts at climate control and charging process are also
the set time. accepted for planned departure times.
Flashes Charging process is active.

Immediate charging
blue
The charging process starts as soon as the
Flashes red Fault in the charging process. charging cable is connected.
Green Charging process is completed. Using iDrive:
1. "Settings"
When the vehicle is locked, the indicator light 2. "Charging"
goes out after some time.
3. "Charge immediately"
When the vehicle is unlocked, the blue indica‐
tor light flashes continuously. The other indica‐ Setting time window for favorable
tor lights go out after some time. charging
Press the button of the remote control to Level 1 or Level 2 charging:
check the charging status. The charging status
When departure time is set, a time window for
is indicated on the indicator light. In some
charging with a favorable electricity rate can be
cases the vehicle is locked.
set via iDrive.
Additional messages about the charging status
Using iDrive:
can be displayed in the instrument cluster, on
the BMW display key, or via the BMW remote 1. "Settings"
app on a smartphone. 2. "Charging"
3. "Low cost charging"
Planning the charging process
4. Set rate begin.
General information 5. Set rate end.
The charging process can be adapted to con‐ The Digital Charging Service enables the time
straints, for instance the cost of electricity. The window to be set automatically for certain loca‐
vehicle can control the charging process in tions. Further information about the Digital
such a way that the charging process is com‐ Charging Service is available on the Internet.
pleted at the departure time. A departure time
The vehicle can also start the charging process
must be set for this purpose, refer to
before the selected time window begins or end
page 182.
it after the selected time window finishes. The
The following settings are available: starting point of the charging process is ad‐
180
justed so the vehicle can be fully charged and, socket, or to prevent simultaneous drawing of
if applicable, its climate controlled right up to high current by multiple consumers.
the departure time. Removing the charging cable, refer to
page 177.
Setting the charge current for
charging via a Level 1 charging cable Continuing the charging process
Depending on the electrical mains, the vehicle If the charging process is interrupted, e.g.,
must be charged with a different charging cur‐ through a temporary power failure, the charg‐
rent strength, refer to page 174. ing process is automatically continued after
Using iDrive: the interruption.
1. "Settings"
Terminating the charging process
2. "Charging"
1. Removing the charging cable from the ve‐
3. "AC charging power:" hicle, refer to page 177.
Settings are stored. When you change charg‐ 2. Stow the charging cable as required.
ing locations you also might need to change
3. Close the charging socket flap.
the setting for charging.
4. Lock vehicle if it is unlocked.
Set the charge current strength at other
household sockets to the lowest level.
Setting the charge current for Displays in the instrument

charging via a Level 2 charging cable cluster
Depending on the electrical mains, the vehicle The charge state indicator light shows the
must be charged with a different charging cur‐ charge state of the high-voltage battery in the
rent strength, refer to page 175. instrument cluster, if standby state is switched
When charging with a Level 2 charging cable, on. If all bars are filled, the high-voltage battery
the charging process can be completed faster is fully charged.
at a Level 2 charging station. Even if no bars are filled, the high-voltage sys‐
Using iDrive: tem is still under high voltage.
Information regarding the charging process are
1. "Settings"
shown on the charging screen, refer to
2. "Charging" page 82.
3. "Level 2:"
Display Meaning
Settings are stored. When you change charg‐
ing locations you also might need to change Blue plug: charging process active
the setting for charging. or completed.
White plug: charging process inter‐
Stopping the charging process rupted.
The charging process can be stopped at any
Running light: animated with active
time by removing the charging cable and con‐
charging process.
tinued at a later time by connecting the charg‐
ing cable. For example, this can be useful to
permit other consumers to use the power
181
Display Meaning Departure time

End of charging time or set depar‐
Concept
ture time.
For optimum range and climate control, the
Charging progress bar. departure time can be set before parking the
vehicle.
Running light: animated with active
charging process. General information
DC charging active on a DC charg‐ With a set departure time, the vehicle is pre-
ing station. heated or pre-cooled during the charging
process if climate control is set. Climate con‐
Indicator in blue: charged electrical trol output is reduced during the trip. This in‐
range. creases the range.
The following settings are possible at depar‐
Indicator in white: maximum electri‐ ture time:
cal range.
▷ Climate control at departure time.
White clock: departure time set. ▷ Planning a one-time departure time.
Blue plug: charging process active ▷ Planning of up to three regular departure
or completed. times per day of the week.
White plug: charging process inter‐ If drive-ready state is switched off, changes
rupted. can be made via iDrive. Departure time can
only be changed once. Scheduled departure
Climate control activated at depar‐ times are not adjusted. Settings for climate
ture time. control and charging process are also applied
for scheduled departure times.
Range with Range Extender.
Climate control at departure time
Via iDrive:
Flashing: ventilation active.
1. "Settings"
2. "Departure time"
Flashing: heating active.
3. "Precond. for departure"
Setting the departure time

Flashing: cooling active.
A departure time can be set when using
Level 1 or Level 2 charging.
Using iDrive:
1. "Settings"
2. "Departure time"
3. "Departure 1:"
182
4. Set the desired days of the week, if If the high-voltage battery and the vehicle bat‐
needed. tery are discharged, it is not possible to oper‐
5. Set the desired time. ate the vehicle.
Up to three departure times can be set. Have the vehicle checked and returned to op‐
eration by a dealer’s service center or another
Activating the departure time qualified service center or repair shop.
Via iDrive:
1. "Settings"
2. "Departure time"
Set departure times are displayed.
3. E. g. "Activate depart. time 1"
Up to three departure times can be activated.
The set departure time will be deactivated, if
the departure time was ignored three times in
a row.
Climate control
General information
The following settings for climate control of
the vehicle are possible:
▷ Activate stationary climate control immedi‐
ately, refer to page 143.
With stationary climate control activated
and no charging cable connected, the
range is reduced.
▷ Planned climate control at the set depar‐
ture time, refer to page 144.
If a Mode 2 charging cable is used, the
high-voltage battery may not be fully
charged at departure time.
Discharged high-voltage and

vehicle battery
General information
In addition to the high-voltage battery, the ve‐
hicle has a 12 volt vehicle battery, which is re‐
quired for operation of the onboard electron‐
ics.
183
Mobility Refueling
Refueling
Vehicle features and options 3. Open the fuel filler flap.
If the fuel filler flap is not opened within
10 minutes after the fuel filler flap was re‐
leased, the fuel filler flap relocks. Press
button again.
and systems. When using these functions and Fuel cap
must be observed. Opening
Before opening , vent the tank, refer to
page 184.
Tank vent 1. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler
flap.
Concept
The vehicle is equipped with a special fuel
tank. The fuel tank is designed for special re‐
quirements that arise from operation with the
Range Extender.
General information
In the fuel tank, excess pressure can build up
due to gasoline vapors which are dissipated
before the fuel cap is opened.
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
Overview
The button is located on the driver's floor area.
Tank venting
1. Switch off drive-ready state.
2. Press button to start the pressure

equalization.
The status of the tank venting is displayed
in the instrument cluster. In rare cases, the
tank venting can last several minutes.
If the tank venting has been completed, a
message is displayed in the instrument
cluster. The fuel filler flap is released for
opening.
184
Refueling Mobility
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached 4. Carefully open the fuel filler flap. Excess
to the fuel filler flap. pressure can build up in the fuel tank from
gasoline vapor.
Closing 5. Fuel the vehicle as usual. The residue

WARNING pressure in the tank may make refueling
difficult, e.g. the fuel pump nozzle may shut
The retaining strap of the fuel cap can be
off frequently.
jammed and crushed during closing. The cap
cannot be correctly closed. Fuel or fuel vapors
can escape. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Pay attention that the retain‐ Observe the following when
ing strap is not jammed or crushed when clos‐ refueling
ing the lid.◀
General information
1. Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you
clearly hear a click. The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
2. Close the fuel filler flap.
Observe safety regulations posted at the gas
station.
Manually unlocking fuel filler flap
E.g., in the event of an electrical malfunction.
Safety information
The release is located in the cargo area.
WARNING
1. Opening the hood, refer to page 202. If a sufficient safety distance from easily
2. Pull the green knob with the fuel pump flammable materials is not maintained, simulta‐
symbol. This releases the fuel filler flap. neous charging and filling with fuel can cause a
risk of fire. There is a risk of injury or risk of
property damage. Do not fill the vehicle with
fuel and charge it simultaneously.◀
NOTE
Fuels are toxic and aggressive. Overfill‐
ing of the fuel tank can damage the fuel sys‐
tem. Painted surfaces may be damaged by
contact with fuel. Escaping fuel can harm the
environment. There is a risk of property dam‐
3. Open the fuel filler flap. age. Avoid overfilling.◀
185
Mobility Fuel
Fuel
Vehicle features and options Safety information
This chapter describes all standard, country- NOTE

specific and optional features offered with the Do not press the Start/Stop button after
series. It also describes features that are not refueling with the wrong fuel. Furthermore, the
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due catalytic converter is permanently damaged.
to the selected options or country versions. There is a risk of property damage. Do not re‐
This also applies to safety-related functions fuel or add the following in the case of gasoline
and systems. When using these functions and engines:
systems, the applicable laws and regulations ▷ Leaded gasoline.
must be observed.
▷ Metallic additives, e.g., manganese or iron.
Do not press the Start/Stop button after refuel‐
ing with the wrong fuel. Contact a dealer’s
Fuel recommendation
ter or repair shop.◀
General information
Depending on the region, many gas stations NOTE
sell fuel that has been customized to winter or Incorrect fuels can damage the fuel sys‐
summer conditions. Fuel that is available in tem and the engine. There is a risk of damage
winter, e.g., helps make a cold start easier. to property. Do not use fuels with a higher per‐
centage of ethanol than recommended. Do not
Gasoline refuel with fuels containing methanol, e.g. M5
to M100.◀
General information
For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline NOTE
should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur con‐ Fuel that does not comply with the mini‐
tent. mum quality can compromise engine function
Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐ or cause engine damage. There is a risk of
taining metal must not be used. property damage. Do not fill with fuel that does
not comply with the minimum quality.◀
Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of
10 %, i. e., E10, may be used for refueling.
Ethanol should meet the following quality stan‐
Recommended fuel grade
dards: BMW recommends AKI 91.
US: ASTM 4806–xx
Minimum fuel grade
CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx
BMW recommends AKI 89.
xx: comply with the current standard in each
case.
186
Wheels and tires Mobility
Wheels and tires

Vehicle features and options The displays of inflation devices may under-
read by up to 0.1 bar/2 psi.
Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tire in‐
flation pressure.
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due For Flat Tire Monitor: after correcting the tire
to the selected options or country versions. inflation pressure, reinitialize the Flat Tire
This also applies to safety-related functions Monitor.
and systems. When using these functions and For Tire Pressure Monitor: perform a reset of
systems, the applicable laws and regulations the Tire Pressure Monitor after adjusting tire
must be observed. pressure to a new value.
Tire inflation pressure specifications

Tire inflation pressure The tire inflation pressure table, refer to
page 188, contains all tire inflation pressure
General information specifications for the specified tire sizes at the
The tire characteristics and tire inflation pres‐ ambient temperature. The tire inflation pres‐
sure influence the following: sure values apply to tire sizes approved by the
▷ The service life of the tires. manufacturer of the vehicle for the vehicle
type.
▷ Road safety.
To identify the correct tire inflation pressure,
▷ Driving comfort. please note the following:
▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle.
Safety information
WARNING Tire fill pressures
A tire with low or missing tire inflation To achieve optimum driving comfort, note the
pressure impacts handling, such as steering pressure specifications in the Tire inflation
and braking response. There is a risk of an ac‐ pressure table, refer to page 188, and adjust
cident. Regularly check the tire inflation pres‐ as needed.
sure, and correct it as needed, e.g., twice a
month and before a long trip.◀
Checking the tire inflation pressure

Only check the tire inflation pressure when the
tires are cold, i.e., after driving no more than
1.25 miles/2 km or when the vehicle has been
parked for at least 2 hours.
Tires heat up while driving, and the tire infla‐
tion pressure increases along with the tire's These pressure values can also be found on
temperature. The tire inflation pressure speci‐ the tire inflation pressure label on the driver's
fications relate to cold tires or tires at ambient side on the rear door.
temperature.
187
Mobility Wheels and tires
Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/160 km/h. Tire size Pressure specifications in
bar/PSI
Tire inflation pressure values
R: 175/60 R 19 - 2.8 / 41
i3 without Range Extender 86 Q M+S A/S
Std
Tire size Pressure specifications in
F: 155/60 R 20 2.3 / 33 -
bar/PSI
80 Q Std
Specifications in Rear: 175/55 R - 2.8 / 41
bar/PSI with cold 20 89 Q XL Std
tires
155/70 R 19 84 2.3 / 33 2.8 / 41 Tire identification marks

Q M+S A/S Std
155/70 R 19 88 Tire size
Q M+S XL Std 245/45 R 18 96 Y
F: 155/70 R 19 2.3 / 33 - 245: nominal width in mm
84 Q M+S A/S 45: aspect ratio in %
Std R: radial tire code
R: 175/60 R 19 - 2.8 / 41 18: rim diameter in inches
86 Q M+S A/S 96: load rating, not for ZR tires
Std
Y: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires
F: 155/60 R 20 2.3 / 33 -
80 Q Std Maximum tire load
Rear: 175/55 R - 2.8 / 41 Maximum tire load is the maximum permissible
20 89 Q XL Std weight for which the tire is approved.
Locate the maximum tire load on the tire side‐
wall and the Gross Axle Weight Rating – GAWR
i3 with Range Extender
– on the certification label on the driver’s side
on the rear door.
Tire size Pressure specifications in
bar/PSI Divide the tire load by 1.1. It must be greater
than one-half of the vehicle’s Gross Axle
Specifications in Weight Rating – GAWR. Note, front vs. rear
bar/PSI with GAWR and tire loads, respectively.
cold tires
Speed letter
155/70 R 19 88 2.3 / 33 2.8 / 41 Q = up to 100 mph, 160 km/h
Q M+S XL Std R = up to 106 mph, 170 km/h
S = up to 112 mph, 180 km/h
F: 155/70 R 19 2.3 / 33 -
84 Q M+S A/S T = up to 118 mph, 190 km/h
Std H = up to 131 mph, 210 km/h
188
V = up to 150 mph, 240 km/h 100. The relative performance of tires depends
W = up to 167 mph, 270 km/h upon the actual conditions of their use, how‐
ever, and may depart significantly from the
Y = up to 186 mph, 300 km/h
norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices and differences in road characteris‐
Tire Identification Number tics and climate.
DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 0117
xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand Traction
xxx: tire size and tire design The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
0117: tire age are AA, A, B, and C.
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of Those grades represent the tire's ability to
the U.S. Department of Transportation. stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government
test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
Tire age
marked C may have poor traction performance.
DOT … 0117: the tire was manufactured in the
1st week of 2017. The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration, cornering,
Recommendation
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Regardless of wear and tear, replace tires at
least every 6 years.
Temperature
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
Quality grades can be found where applicable generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder heat when tested under controlled conditions
and maximum section width. on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
E.g.: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Tempera‐ Sustained high temperature can cause the ma‐
ture A terial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire
life, and excessive temperature can lead to
DOT Quality Grades sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds
Treadwear to a level of performance which all passenger
vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Mo‐
Traction AA A B C
tor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades
Temperature A B C Band A represent higher levels of performance
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum
Federal Safety Requirements in addition to required by law.
these grades.
WARNING
Treadwear The temperature grade for this tire is es‐

tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
tion, or excessive loading, either separately or
under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐
in combination, can cause heat buildup and
ernment test course. E.g., a tire graded 150
possible tire failure.◀
would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times as well
on the government course as a tire graded
189
M+S Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces,

Winter and all-season tires with better cold as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles
weather performance than summer tires. can cause serious damage to wheels, tires and
suspension parts. This is more likely to occur
with low-profile tires, which provide less cush‐
ioning between the wheel and the road. Be
Tire tread careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your
speed, especially if your vehicle is equipped
Summer tires
with low-profile tires.
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
Indications of tire damage or other vehicle mal‐
0.12 inches/3 mm.
functions:
There is an increased risk of hydroplaning if
▷ Unusual vibrations while driving.
the tire tread depth is less than 0.12 in‐
ches/3 mm. ▷ Unusual handling such as a strong ten‐
dency to pull to the left or right.
Winter tires Damage can, e.g., be caused by driving over
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than curbs, road damage, or similar things.
0.16 inches/4 mm.
Below a tread depth of 0.16 inches/4 mm, tires Safety information
are less suitable for winter operation. WARNING
Damaged tires can lose tire inflation
Minimum tread depth pressure, which can lead to loss of vehicle
control. There is a risk of an accident. If tire
damage is suspected while driving, immedi‐
ately reduce speed and stop. Have wheels and
tires checked. For this purpose, drive carefully
to the nearest dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Have vehicle towed or transported as
needed.◀
WARNING
Wear indicators are distributed around the
Damaged tires can lose tire inflation
tire's circumference and have the legally re‐
pressure, which can lead to loss of vehicle
quired minimum height of 0.063 in‐
control. There is a risk of an accident. Do not
ches/1.6 mm.
repair damaged tires, but have them re‐
The wear indicators are marked on the tire placed.◀
sidewall with TWI, Tread Wear Indicator.
WARNING
Tires can become damaged by driving
over obstacles, e.g., curbs or road damage, at
Tire damage
high speed. Larger wheels have a smaller tire
cross-section. The smaller the tire cross-sec‐
General information
tion, the higher the risk of tire damage. There
Inspect your tires regularly for damage, foreign is a danger of accidents and property damage.
objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.
190
If possible, drive around obstacles, or drive Recommended tire brands

over them slowly and carefully.◀
Changing wheels and tires

Mounting
Have mounting and wheel balancing carried
out by a dealer’s service center or another
For each tire size, BMW recommends certain
Wheel and tire combination tire brands. The tire brands can be identified
by a star on the tire sidewall.
General information
You can ask the dealer’s service center or an‐ New tires
other qualified service center or repair shop
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐
about the correct wheel/tire combination and
ing circumstances when tires are brand-new;
wheel rim versions for the vehicle.
they achieve their full traction potential after a
Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair break-in time.
the function of a variety of systems such as
Drive conservatively for the first
ABS or DSC.
200 miles/300 km.
To maintain good handling and vehicle re‐
sponse, use only tires with a single tread con‐ Retreaded tires
figuration from a single manufacturer.
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐
Following tire damage, have the original wheel ommend the use of retreaded tires.
and tire combination remounted on the vehicle
as soon as possible. WARNING
Retreaded tires can have different tire
Safety information casing structures. With advanced age the serv‐
ice life can be limited. There is a risk of an acci‐
WARNING
dent. The manufacturer of your vehicle does
Wheels and tires which are not suitable not recommend the use of retreaded tires.◀
for your vehicle can damage parts of the vehi‐
cle, for instance due to contact with the body
due to tolerances despite the same official size Winter tires
rating. There is a risk of an accident. The man‐ Winter tires are recommended for operating on
ufacturer of your vehicle strongly suggests winter roads.
that you use wheels and tires that have been Although so-called all-season M+S tires pro‐
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer for vide better winter traction than summer tires,
your vehicle type.◀ they do not provide the same level of perform‐
ance as winter tires.
191
Maximum speed of winter tires side the immediate area in a safe place,
If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher such as behind a guardrail.
than the permissible speed for the winter tires, ▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle or
then attach a corresponding information label/ portable hazard warning light at a sufficient
sticker in the field of view. The label is available distance.
from a dealer’s service center or another quali‐ ▷ Change wheels only on a flat, solid and
fied service center or repair shop. slip-resistant surface. On soft or slippery
With mounted winter tires, observe and adhere ground, for example snow, ice, tiles, etc.,
to the permissible maximum speed. the vehicle or the vehicle jack may slip
away sideways.
Rotating wheels between axles ▷ Do not place wood blocks or similar items
Different wear patterns can occur on the front under the vehicle jack; otherwise, it cannot
and rear axles depending on individual driving reach its carrying capacity because of the
conditions. The tires can be rotated between restricted height.
the axles to achieve even wear. Further infor‐ ▷ If the vehicle is raised, do not lie under the
mation is available from a dealer’s service cen‐ vehicle and do not start the engine, or else
ter or another qualified service center or repair there is a danger to life.
shop. After rotating, check the tire pressure
and correct, if needed.
Rotating the tires between the axes is not per‐ Mobility System
missible on vehicles with different tire sizes or
rim sizes on the front and rear axles. Concept
With the Mobility System, minor tire damage
Storage can be sealed temporarily to enable continued
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry and dark travel. To accomplish this, sealant is pumped
place. into the tires, which seals the damage from the
Always protect tires against all contact with oil, inside.
grease and fuels. The compressor can be used to check the tire
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐ inflation pressure.
sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.
General information
▷ Follow the instructions on using the Mobi‐
Repairing a flat tire lity System found on the compressor and
sealant container.
Safety measures ▷ Use of the Mobility System may be ineffec‐
▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible tive if the tire puncture measures approx.
from passing traffic and on solid ground. 1/8 inches/4 mm or more.
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system. ▷ Contact a dealer’s service center or an‐
▷ Secure the vehicle against rolling away by other qualified service center or repair
setting the parking brake. shop if the tire cannot be made drivable.
▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the ▷ If possible, do not remove foreign bodies
vehicle and ensure that they remain out‐ that have penetrated the tire.
192
▷ Pull the speed limit sticker off the sealant 5 On/off switch
container and apply it to the steering
6 Compressor
wheel.
7 Connector/cable for socket
▷ The use of a sealant can damage the TPM
wheel electronics. In this case, have the 8 Connection hose
electronics checked and replaced at the
next opportunity. Filling the tire with sealant
Overview Safety information
Storage DANGER
The mobility system is located in the storage If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila‐
compartment under the hood. tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can
enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases con‐
Sealant container tain pollutants which are colorless and odor‐
less. In enclosed areas, exhaust gases can also
accumulate outside of the vehicle. There is
danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and
ensure sufficient ventilation.◀
NOTE
The compressor can overheat during ex‐
tended operation. There is a risk of property
damage. Do not run the compressor for more
than 10 min.◀
▷ Sealant container, arrow 1.
▷ Filling hose, arrow 2. Filling
Observe use-by date on the sealant container. 1. Shake the sealant container.
Compressor
1 Sealant container unlocking

2 Holder for sealant container
3 Inflation pressure dial
4 Reduce inflation pressure
193
2. Pull filling hose completely out of the cover 5. With the compressor switched off, insert
of the sealant container. Do not kink the the plug into the power socket inside the
hose. vehicle.
3. Slide the sealant container into the holder 6. With standby state or drive-ready state
on the compressor housing, ensuring that switched on, switch on the compressor.
it engages audibly.
Let the compressor run for max. 10 minutes to

4. Screw the filling hose of the sealant con‐ fill the tire with sealant and achieve a tire infla‐
tainer onto the tire valve of the nonworking tion pressure of approx. 2.5 bar.
wheel. While the tire is being filled with sealant, the
tire inflation pressure may sporadically reach
approx. 5 bar. Do not switch off the compres‐
sor at this point.
Checking and adjusting the tire

inflation pressure
Checking
1. Switch off the compressor.
2. Read the tire inflation pressure on the tire
pressure gage.
To continue the trip, a tire inflation pressure of
at least 2 bar must be reached.
194
Removing and stowing the sealant service center or another qualified service
container center or repair shop.
1. Unscrew the filling hose of the sealant con‐ If a tire inflation pressure of at least 2 bar is
tainer from the wheel. reached, see Minimum tire inflation pres‐
2. Press the red release button. sure is reached.
3. Remove the sealant container from the 6. Unscrew the connection hose of the com‐
compressor. pressor from the tire valve.
4. Wrap the empty sealant container in suita‐ 7. Pull the connector out of the power socket
ble material to avoid dirtying the cargo inside the vehicle.
area. 8. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.
Minimum tire inflation pressure is not Minimum tire inflation pressure is

reached reached
1. Pull the connector out of the power socket 1. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.
inside the vehicle. 2. Immediately drive approx. 5 miles/10 km to
2. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back to dis‐ ensure that the sealant is evenly distrib‐
tribute the sealant in the tire. uted in the tire.
3. Screw the connection hose of the com‐ Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
pressor directly onto the tire valve stem. If possible, do not drive at speeds less than
12 mph/20 km/h.
Adjustment
1. Stop at a suitable location.
2. Screw the connection hose of the com‐
pressor directly onto the tire valve stem.
4. Insert the connector into the power socket

inside the vehicle.
5. With standby state or drive-ready state

switched on, switch on the compressor.
If a tire inflation pressure of at least 2 bar
cannot be reached, contact your dealer’s
195
3. Insert the connector into the power socket Information regarding suitable snow chains is
inside the vehicle. available from a dealer’s service center or an‐
Use
WARNING
With the mounting of snow chains on un‐
suitable tires, the snow chains can come into
contact with vehicle parts. There is a risk of ac‐
cidents or risk of property damage. Only mount
snow chains on tires that are designated by
4. Correct the tire inflation pressure to at their manufacturer as suitable for the use of
least 2.0 bar. snow chains.◀
▷ Increase pressure: with standby state Use only in pairs on the rear wheels, equipped
or drive-ready state switched on, with the tires of the following size:
switch on the compressor.
▷ 155/70 R 19.
▷ To reduce the pressure: press the but‐
Follow the snow chain manufacturer's instruc‐
ton on the compressor.
tions.
5. Unscrew the connection hose of the com‐
Make sure that the snow chains are always
pressor from the tire valve.
sufficiently tight. Re-tighten as needed ac‐
6. Pull the connector out of the power socket cording to the snow chain manufacturer's in‐
inside the vehicle. structions.
7. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle. Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after
mounting snow chains, as doing so may result
Continuing the trip in incorrect readings.
Do not exceed the maximum permissible Do not initialize the Tire Pressure Monitor after
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. mounting snow chains, as doing so may result
Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor. in incorrect readings.
Reinitialize the Tire Pressure Monitor. When driving with snow chains, briefly activate
Replace the nonworking tire and the sealant Dynamic Traction Control, if needed.
container of the Mobility System promptly.
Maximum speed with snow chains
Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h
Snow chains when using snow chains.
Fine-link snow chains

The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends Changing wheels/tires
use of fine-link snow chains. Certain types of
fine-link snow chains have been tested by the General information
manufacturer of the vehicle and recommended When tire sealants are used, an immediate
as road-safe and suitable. wheel change when there is a loss of tire infla‐
tion pressure in the event of a flat tire is not al‐
ways necessary.
196
If needed, the tools for changing wheels are slip when it is being cranked up. There is a risk
available as accessories from a dealer’s service of injury or risk of damage to property. When
center or another qualified service center or re‐ cranking up the vehicle jack, ensure that it is
pair shop. inserted in the jacking point next to the wheel
housing.◀
Safety information
WARNING
WARNING
A vehicle that is raised on a vehicle jack
The vehicle jack is provided by the vehi‐ may fall off of the jack if lateral forces are ex‐
cle manufacturer for changing wheels in the erted on it. There is a risk of injury and risk of
event of a flat tire. The vehicle jack is not de‐ damage to property. While the vehicle is
signed for frequent use, for instance for chang‐ raised, do not exert lateral forces on the vehicle
ing from summer to winter tires. Using the ve‐ or pull abruptly on the vehicle. Have a stuck
hicle jack frequently may cause it to jam or wheel removed by a dealer’s service center or
become damaged. There is a risk of injury and another qualified service center or repair
risk of damage to property. Only use the vehi‐ shop.◀
cle jack to change an emergency wheel or a
spare tire in the event of a flat tire.◀
Securing the vehicle against rolling
WARNING
On soft or slippery ground, e.g., snow,
General information
ice, tiles, etc., the vehicle jack can slip away. The vehicle manufacturer recommends to ad‐
There is a risk of injury. If possible, change the ditionally secure the vehicle against rolling
tire/wheel on a flat, solid and slip-resistant sur‐ away when changing a wheel.
face.◀
On a level surface
WARNING
The vehicle jack is only provided for
short-term lifting of the vehicle for wheel
changes. Even if all safety measures are ob‐
served, there is a risk of the raised vehicle fall‐
ing, if the vehicle jack tilts over. There is a risk
of injuries or danger to life. If the vehicle is
raised, do not lie under the vehicle and do not
start the engine.◀
WARNING Place chocks or other suitable objects, for ex‐

The vehicle jack is optimized for lifting ample a rock, in front of and behind the wheel
the vehicle and for the jacking points on the that is diagonally opposite to the wheel that
vehicle only. There is a risk of injury. Do not lift you wish to change.
any other vehicle or cargo using the vehicle
jack.◀
WARNING
If the vehicle jack is not inserted into the
jacking point provided for this purpose, the ve‐
hicle may be damaged or the vehicle jack may
197
On a slight downhill gradient Jacking points for the vehicle jack
If you need to change a wheel on a slight The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐
downhill grade, place chocks and other suita‐ cated at the indicated positions.
ble objects, for instance a rock, under the
wheels of both the front and rear axles against
Jacking up the vehicle
the rolling direction.
WARNING
Preparing the vehicle Hands and fingers can be jammed when

using the vehicle jack. There is a risk of injury.
▷ Change the wheel as far away as possible
Comply with the described hand position and
from passing traffic.
▷ Park the vehicle on solid, non-slip and level
ground.
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system.
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ Engage a gear or selector lever position P.
▷ As soon as permitted by the traffic flow,
have all vehicle occupants get out of the
vehicle and ensure that they remain out‐
side the immediate area in a safe place,
such as behind a guardrail.
▷ Depending on the equipment version, get
tools and the emergency wheel from the
vehicle.
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle or
portable hazard warning lamp at an appro‐
priate distance.
▷ Do not place wood blocks or similar items
under the vehicle jack; otherwise, it cannot
reach its carrying capacity because of the
restricted height.
▷ Secure the vehicle additionally against roll‐
ing.
▷ Loosen the lug bolts a half turn.
198
do not change this position while using the ve‐ 5. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot is ex‐
hicle jack.◀ tended vertically.
1. Hold the vehicle jack with one hand, ar‐

row 1, and grasp the crank with your other
hand, arrow 2.
6. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot stands

vertically and perpendicularly beneath the
jacking point after extending the vehicle
jack.
2. Insert the vehicle jack into the rectangular
recess of the jacking point closest to the
wheel to be changed.
7. Crank up the vehicle jack until the entire

surface of the jack is in contact with the
ground and the wheel in question is raised
3. Extend the vehicle jack by turning the
a maximum of 1.2 inches/3 cm off the
crank or lever clockwise.
ground.
Mounting a wheel
Mount one emergency wheel only.
1. Unscrew the lug bolts and remove the

wheel.
2. Put the new wheel or emergency wheel on
and screw in at least two bolts in a cross‐
wise pattern until hand-tight.
4. Take your hand away from the jack as soon If non-original light-alloy wheels of the ve‐
as the vehicle jack is under load and con‐ hicle manufacturer are mounted, the ac‐
tinue turning the crank or lever with one companying lug bolts may have to be used
hand. as well.
3. Hand-tighten the remaining lug bolts and
tighten all bolts well in a crosswise pattern.
199
4. Turn the crank on the vehicle jack counter‐

clockwise to retract the jack and lower the
vehicle.
5. Remove the vehicle jack.
After the wheel change

1. Tighten the lug bolts crosswise. The tight‐
ening torque is 101 lb ft/140 Nm.
2. Stow the nonworking wheel in the cargo
area.
The nonworking wheel cannot be stored
under the cargo floor panel because of its
size.
3. Check tire inflation pressure at the next op‐
portunity and correct as needed.
4. Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor.
5. Check to make sure the lug bolts are tight
with a calibrated torque wrench.
6. Drive to the nearest dealer’s service center
or another qualified service center or repair
shop to have the damaged tire replaced.
200
Under the hood Mobility
Under the hood

What is important under the hood
1 Washer fluid reservoir 3 Coolant reservoir for climate control

2 With Range Extender: filler flap emergency 4 Coolant reservoir for drive
unlocking
The occasional use cable compartment in the be performed only by an authorized BMW i
center is used for storage of the charging ca‐ dealer's service center or another qualified
bles. service center or repair shop.◀
Moisture can penetrate into the occasional use
NOTE
cable compartment, e.g., in a vehicle wash.
Folded-away wipers can be jammed
when the hood is opened. There is a risk of
property damage. Make sure that the wipers
Hood with the wiper blades mounted are folded
down onto the windshield before opening the
Safety information
hood.◀
WARNING
Improperly executed work under the
hood can damage components and lead to a
safety risk. There is a risk of accidents or risk
of property damage. The manufacturer of your
vehicle recommends that work under the hood
201
Mobility Under the hood
Opening hood WARNING

An incorrectly locked hood can open
Unlock hood while driving and restrict visibility. There is a
risk of an accident. Stop immediately and cor‐
1. Press button on the remote con‐ rectly close the hood.◀
trol or in the driver's floor area, refer to
page 45. WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when open‐
Opening hood ing and closing the hood. There is a risk of in‐
1. Press the release handle and open the jury. Make sure that the area of movement of
hood. hood is clear during opening and closing.◀
Indicator/warning lights
When the hood is opened, a Check Control
message is displayed.
Closing the hood
From approx. 16 inches/40 cm height allow to

fall and press again to lock the hook com‐
pletely.
Make sure you hear the hood engage.
202
Engine oil Mobility
Engine oil
Vehicle features and options 3. Remove the cargo floor panel.

must be observed.
4. Turn the lid counterclockwise and remove.
General information
Engine oil consumption depends on the fre‐
quency of Range Extender use. Therefore,
regularly check the engine oil level after refuel‐
ing.
Checking the oil level

5. After approx. 5, minutes, remove the dip
General information stick and wipe with a lint-free cloth, paper
Check the engine oil level with Range Extender towel or similar.
warmed up to operating temperature.
After switching off the Range Extender, wait
several minutes before checking the oil level
so that the engine oil can collect in the oil pan.
Checking
1. Park the vehicle in horizontal position in a
safe place.
2. Switch the engine off.
6. Carefully insert the dipstick up to the stop
in the measuring tube, and pull it back out.
The engine oil level must be between the
two marks of the dipstick.
203
Mobility Engine oil
Adding or changing engine

oil
Have engine oil added or changed by a deal‐
er's service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop if necessary.
204
Coolant Mobility
Coolant
Vehicle features and options Coolant reservoir
This chapter describes all standard, country- The vehicle has two coolant reservoirs that are
specific and optional features offered with the located under the hood.
series. It also describes features that are not To ensure the operational reliability of the vehi‐
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due cle, always check the coolant level of both
to the selected options or country versions. coolant reservoirs.
Opening the hood, refer to page 202.
must be observed.
General information
Coolant consists of water and additives.
The vehicle's cooling circuits are filled with dif‐
ferent types of coolant. Do not mix the differ‐
ent types of coolant.
1 Coolant reservoir for climate control
Not all commercially available additives are
2 Coolant reservoir for drive
suitable for the vehicle. Information about suit‐
able additives is available from a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop. Coolant level
Coolant reservoir for climate control
Safety information
Checking
WARNING
1. Allow the air conditioner to cool down.
With the engine hot and the cooling sys‐
2. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly
tem open, coolant can escape and lead to
counterclockwise to allow any excess
scalding. There is a risk of injury. Only open
pressure to dissipate, then open it.
the cooling system with the engine cooled
down.◀
WARNING
Additives are harmful and incorrect addi‐
tives can damage the engine. There is a risk of
injury and risk of property damage. Do not al‐
low additives to come into contact with skin,
eyes or articles of clothing. Use suitable addi‐
tives only.◀
3. Check the coolant level.
205
Mobility Coolant
The coolant level is correct if it lies be‐ Disposal

tween the minimum and maximum marks
in the reservoir. Comply with the relevant environmen‐
tal protection regulations when dispos‐
Adding ing of coolant and coolant additives.
1. Slowly add coolant up to the specified
level; do not overfill.
2. Close the cap.
3. Have cause of the coolant loss eliminated
qualified service center or repair shop as
quickly as possible.
Coolant reservoir for drive
Checking
1. Allow the drive to cool down.
2. Check the coolant level.
The marks are on the side of the coolant
reservoir. The coolant level is correct if it
lies between the minimum and maximum
marks.
Adding
1. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly
counterclockwise to allow any excess
pressure to dissipate, then open it.
2. Slowly add coolant up to the specified

level; do not overfill.
3. Close the cap.
4. Have cause of the coolant loss eliminated
qualified service center or repair shop as
quickly as possible.
206
Maintenance Mobility
Maintenance
Vehicle features and options Condition Based Service
This chapter describes all standard, country- CBS
series. It also describes features that are not Concept
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due Sensors and special algorithms take into ac‐
to the selected options or country versions. count the driving conditions of the vehicle.
This also applies to safety-related functions CBS uses these to calculate the need for
and systems. When using these functions and maintenance.
systems, the applicable laws and regulations The system makes it possible to adapt the
must be observed. amount of maintenance corresponding to your
user profile.
BMW maintenance system General information

The maintenance system indicates required Information on service requirements, refer to
maintenance measures, and thereby provides page 90, can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
support in maintaining road safety and the op‐ play.
erational reliability of the vehicle.
In some cases, scopes and intervals may vary
Service data in the remote control
according to the country-specific version. Re‐ Information on the required maintenance is
placement work, spare parts, fuels and lubri‐ continuously stored in the remote control. The
cants, and wear materials are calculated sepa‐ dealer’s service center can read this data out
rately. Further information is available from a and suggest a maintenance scope for the vehi‐
dealer’s service center or another qualified cle.
service center or repair shop. Therefore, hand the service advisor the remote
control with which the vehicle was driven most
recently.
Safety information
Storage periods
DANGER
Storage periods during which the vehicle bat‐
Improperly executed work, in particular
tery was disconnected are not taken into ac‐
count.
system, can lead to electric shock. There is a
risk of injury, fire and danger to life. If this occurs, have a dealer's service center or
another qualified service center or repair shop
update the time-dependent maintenance pro‐
that the work on the vehicle, in particular main‐
cedures, such as checking brake fluid and, if
necessary, changing the engine oil and the mi‐
authorized BMW i dealer’s service center or
crofilter/activated-charcoal filter.
shop.◀
207
Mobility Maintenance
Service and Warranty Position

Information Booklet for US
models and Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
Please consult your Service and Warranty In‐
formation Booklet for US models and Warranty
and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod‐
els for additional information on service re‐
quirements. Located on the driver's side is an OBD socket
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends for reading the vehicle data.
that maintenance and repair be performed by a On vehicles with Range Extender, additional
dealer’s service center or another qualified components are checked that are critical for its
service center or repair shop. Records of regu‐ emissions mix.
lar maintenance and repair work should be re‐
tained.
Emissions
Applies to vehicles with Range Extender.
Socket for OBD Onboard ▷ The warning lamp lights up:
Diagnosis Emissions are deteriorating. Have
the vehicle checked as soon as
Safety information possible.
NOTE ▷ The warning lamp flashes under certain
The socket for Onboard Diagnosis is an circumstances:
intricate component intended to be used in This indicates that there is excessive mis‐
conjunction with specialized equipment to firing in the engine.
check the vehicle’s primary emissions system. Reduce the vehicle speed and have the
Improper use of the socket for Onboard Diag‐ system checked immediately; otherwise,
nosis, or contact with the socket for Onboard serious engine misfiring within a brief pe‐
Diagnosis for other than its intended purpose, riod can seriously damage emission con‐
can cause vehicle malfunctions and creates trol components, in particular the catalytic
risks of personal and property damage. Given converter.
the foregoing, the manufacture of your vehicle
strongly recommends that access to the
socket for Onboard Diagnosis be limited to a
dealer's service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop or other persons
that have the specialized training and equip‐
ment for purposes of properly utilizing the
socket for Onboard Diagnosis.◀
208
Replacing components Mobility
Replacing components
Vehicle features and options 4. Remove the wiper blade toward one side.

must be observed.
5. Insert the new wiper blade in reverse order
of removal until it locks in place.
Wiper blade replacement 6. Fold down the wipers.
Safety information Rear

NOTE 1. Lift off the wiper fully and pull off the wiper
If the wiper arm falls onto the windshield blade, arrow.
without the wiper blades installed, the wind‐
shield can be damaged. There is a risk of prop‐
erty damage. Secure the wiper arm when re‐
placing the wiper blades and do not fold down
the wipers without the wiper blades installed.◀
Front
1. To change the wiper blades, fold up the
wiper arms, refer to page 78.
2. Fold up the wipers. 2. Attach a new wiper blade. It must engage
audibly.
3. Fold down the wipers.
Light/bulb replacement
General information
Lights and bulbs

Lights and bulbs make an essential contribu‐
3. Position the wiper blade in a horizontal po‐
tion to vehicle safety.
sition.
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that
you have the relevant work carried out a deal‐
209
Mobility Replacing components
er’s service center or another qualified service Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)

center or repair shop.
WARNING
A spare light box is available from a dealer’s
Too intensive brightness can irritate or
damage the retina of the eye. There is a risk of
ter or repair shop.
injury. Do not look directly into the headlights
Observe the safety information, refer to or other light sources. Do not remove the LED
page 210. covers.◀
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)

Headlight glass
Some items of equipment use light-emitting
Condensation can form on the inside of the ex‐
diodes installed behind a cover as a light
ternal lights in cool or humid weather. When
source. These light-emitting diodes, which are
driving with the lights switched on, the con‐
related to conventional lasers, are officially
densation evaporates after a short time. The
designated as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.
headlight glass does not need to be changed.
Observe the safety information, refer to
If despite driving with the lights switched on,
page 210.
increasing humidity forms, e.g., water droplets
in the lamp, the manufacturer of your vehicle
Safety information recommends having it checked by a dealer’s
Lights and bulbs ter or repair shop.
WARNING
Bulbs can get hot during operation. Con‐ Headlight setting
tact with the bulbs can cause burns. There is a The headlight adjustments can be affected by
risk of injury. Only change bulbs after they changing lights and bulbs. After the headlight
have cooled off.◀ adjustment was changed, have it checked and,
if necessary, corrected by a dealer’s service
WARNING center or another qualified service center or re‐
Work on switched-on lighting systems pair shop.
can cause short circuits. There is a risk of in‐
jury or risk of property damage. When working
on the lighting system, switch off the lamps in
question. If necessary, heed the bulb manufac‐
turer's instructions.◀
NOTE
Dirty bulbs have a reduced service life.
There is a risk of property damage. Do not hold
new bulbs with your bare hands. Use a clean
cloth or something similar, or hold the bulb by
its base.◀
210
Front lights, bulb replacement 55-watt bulb, H7.
1. Fold up cover in front of the headlights.

Halogen headlights
Overview
Halogen headlights
2. Turn the lid counterclockwise and remove.
1 Parking lights / daytime running lights

2 Low beams
Halogen headlights with LED lighting

elements
3. Remove the connector, arrow 1. Press the

bulb holder into the direction of the bulb
and to the right to remove it from the an‐
chor, arrow 2.

2 Low beams
Low beams
Observe the safety information, refer to 4. Fold the bulb holder down.
page 210. 5. Turn the bulb counterclockwise and re‐
move.
6. To insert the bulb and bulb holder, proceed
in reverse order of removal. Make sure that
the bulb holder snaps into place.
7. Close the headlight housing with the lid.
Make sure that the lid engages.
211
LED headlights Access
General information
With LED headlights, all front lights and park‐
ing lights/daytime running lights are designed
with LED technology.
In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer’s
ter or repair shop.
Overview In the wheel house, turn the cover counter‐

clockwise and remove it.
Turn signal
24-watt bulb, PSY24W.
1. Turn the left bulb holder counterclockwise

and remove.

2 Low beams
Parking lights/daytime running lights

Parking lights/daytime running lights are de‐
signed with LED technology.
In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer’s 2. Press the bulb gently into the socket, turn
service center or another qualified service cen‐ counterclockwise and remove.
ter or repair shop.
3. Install the new bulb and bulb holder in re‐
verse order of removal.
Turn signal and high beams
4. Attach the cover to the wheel house.
page 210.
212
High beams Vehicle battery

55-watt bulb, H11.
The vehicle battery has 12 volts. The battery
1. Turn the right bulb holder counterclock‐ supplies the onboard electronics with energy.
wise and remove. Information about the high-voltage system, re‐
fer to page 174.
Maintenance
The battery is maintenance-free.
The added amount of acid is sufficient for the
service life of the battery.
More information about the battery can be re‐
quested from a dealer’s service center or an‐
2. Press the bulb gently into the socket, turn
counterclockwise and remove. Replacing the vehicle battery
3. Install the new bulb and bulb holder in re‐
verse order of removal. General information
4. Attach the cover to the wheel house. The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
that you have a dealer’s service center or an‐
Turn signal in exterior mirror other qualified service center or repair shop
Observe the safety information, refer to register the vehicle battery to the vehicle after
page 210. the battery has been replaced. Once the bat‐
tery has been registered again, all comfort fea‐
The turn signals in the exterior mirrors feature
tures will be available without restriction and
LED technology. In the case of a malfunction,
any Check Control messages displayed which
contact a dealer’s service center or another
relate to comfort features will disappear.
Safety information
Tail lamps, bulb replacement
NOTE
page 210. Vehicle batteries that are not compatible
can damage vehicle systems and impair vehi‐
The tail lamps in the tailgate feature LED tech‐
cle functions. There is a risk of personal and
nology.
property damage. Only vehicle batteries that
The lights in the bumper include the function are compatible with your vehicle type should
of the rear fog lamp and the reverse gear lights. be installed in your vehicle. Information on
In addition, the lights in the bumper assume compatible vehicle batteries is available at your
the function of the tail lamps if the tailgate is dealer’s service center.◀
opened.
In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer’s Charging the vehicle battery
ter or repair shop. General information
Charging a discharged battery, refer to
page 183.
213
Safety information Replacing a fuse

NOTE The fuses are located in the passenger floor
area under the dashboard.
Non-compatible external chargers can
damage the vehicle. There is a risk of personal 1. To open, loosen screws, arrow 1.
and property damage. Only charging devices
that are compatible with your vehicle and that
are below the maximum charge voltage should
be used to charge your vehicle. Information on
compatible chargers is available at your deal‐
er’s service center.◀
Power failure
After a power loss, some equipment needs to
be newly initialized or individual settings up‐ 2. Fold down the fuse holder, arrow 2.
dated, for example:
Information on the fuse types and locations
▷ Time: update. is found on a separate sheet.
▷ Date: update. 3. Replace the fuse in question.
▷ Glass sunroof and sliding visor: initialize 4. The installation is done in reverse order
the system. from the removal.
Disposing of old batteries

Have old batteries disposed of by a
dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop
or take them to a collection point.
Maintain the battery in an upright position for
transport and storage. Secure the battery so
that it does not tip over during transport.
Fuses
Safety information
WARNING
Incorrect and repaired fuses can overload
electrical lines and components. There is a risk
of fire. Never attempt to repair a blown fuse.
Do not replace a nonworking fuse with a sub‐
stitute of another color or amperage rating.◀
214
Breakdown assistance Mobility
Breakdown assistance
Vehicle features and options Overview

must be observed.
SOS button in the roofliner
Hazard warning flashers Functional requirements

▷ The SIM card integrated in the vehicle has
been activated.
▷ The radio-ready state is switched on.
▷ The Assist system is functional.
Initiating an Emergency Request

automatically
Under certain conditions, such as if the airbags
The button is located in the center console. trigger, an Emergency Request is automati‐
cally initiated immediately after a severe acci‐
The red light in the button flashes when the dent. Automatic Collision Notification is not af‐
hazard warning flashers are activated. fected by pressing the SOS button.
Initiating an Emergency Request

Intelligent emergency call manually
1. Press the cover briefly to open it.
Concept 2. Press the SOS button until the LED at the
In case of an emergency, an Emergency Re‐ button lights up green.
quest can be made through the system. ▷ The LED is illuminated green when an
Emergency Request has been initiated.
General information
If a cancel prompt appears on the Control
Only press the SOS button in an emergency. Display, the Emergency Request can be
For technical reasons, the Emergency Request aborted.
cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable con‐ If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle
ditions. until the voice connection has been estab‐
lished.
215
Mobility Breakdown assistance
▷ The LED flashes green when a connection First-aid kit

to the BMW Response Center has been
established. General information
The BMW Response Center then makes Some of the articles have a limited service life.
contact with you and takes further steps to
Check the expiration dates of the contents
help you.
regularly and replace any expired items
Even if you are unable to respond, the promptly.
BMW Response Center can take further
steps to help you under certain circum‐ Storage
stances.
The first-aid kit is located at the rear of the
For this, data is transmitted to the BMW cargo area.
Response Center which serves to deter‐
mine the necessary rescue measures. E.g.,
the current position of the vehicle, if it can
Jump-starting
be established.
Even if you can no longer hear the BMW DANGER
Response Center through the loudspeak‐ Due to the high voltage of the drive sys‐
ers, the BMW Response Center may still tem, there is a risk of electric shock. There is
be able to hear you. danger to life. Do not jump or directly charge
The BMW Response Center ends the Emer‐ the vehicle battery with conventional jump-
gency Request. starting.◀
Roadside Assistance Towing

Service availability Transporting the vehicle
Roadside Assistance can be reached around
the clock in many countries. You can obtain as‐ General information
sistance there in the event of a vehicle break‐ The vehicle is not permitted to be towed.
down.
Safety information
Roadside Assistance NOTE
The Roadside Assistance phone number can The vehicle can be damaged when tow‐
be viewed via iDrive or a connection to Road‐ ing the vehicle with a single lifted axle. There is
side Assistance can be established directly. a risk of property damage. The vehicle should
only be transported on a loading platform.◀
Warning triangle
The warning triangle is located in the hood.
216
Tow truck Towing other vehicles
General information
Switch on the hazard warning system, depend‐
ing on local regulations.
If the electrical system has failed, clearly iden‐
tify the vehicle being towed by placing a sign
or a warning triangle in the rear window.
Safety information
The vehicle should only be transported on a WARNING
loading platform.
If the approved gross vehicle weight of
the towing vehicle is lighter than the vehicle to
NOTE
be towed, the tow fitting can tear off or it will
The vehicle can become damaged when not be possible to control the vehicle's re‐
lifting and securing it. sponse. There is a risk of an accident! Make
There is a risk of damage to property. sure that the gross vehicle weight of the tow‐
▷ Lift the vehicle using suitable means. ing vehicle is heavier than the vehicle to be
towed.◀
▷ Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its tow
fitting, body parts, or suspension parts.◀ NOTE
If the tow bar or tow rope is attached in‐
Pushing the vehicle correctly, damage to other vehicle parts can
To remove a disabled vehicle from the danger occur. There is a risk of property damage. Cor‐
area, push it for a short distance at a speed of rectly attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow
no more than 6 mph/10 km/h. fitting.◀
The vehicle can only be pushed in selector
lever position N. Tow bar
In order to ensure that the vehicle can roll, pro‐ The tow fittings used should be on the same
ceed as follows: side on both vehicles.
1. Switch on drive-ready state, refer to Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting
page 67. the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe
2. Depress brake pedal. the following:
3. Engage selector lever position N. ▷ Maneuvering capability is limited going

around corners.
If there is a malfunction, it may happen that
you cannot change the selector lever position. ▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it
is secured with an offset.
Electronically unlock the transmission lock, if
needed, refer to page 70.
Tow rope
When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure
that the tow rope is taut.
Use nylon ropes or straps, which will enable
the vehicle to be towed without jerking.
217
Mobility Breakdown assistance
Tow fitting Screw thread for tow fitting
General information
Press on the mark on the edge of the cover to

push it out.
The screw-in tow fitting should always be car‐
ried in the vehicle.
The tow fitting can be screwed in at the front What to do after an accident
or rear of the vehicle.
The tow fitting is located in the storage com‐ Safety information
partment under the hood. WARNING
Use of the tow fitting: Contact with live components can lead to
▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with the an electric shock. There is a risk of injuries or
vehicle and screw it all the way in. danger to life. After an accident, do not touch
any high-voltage components such as orange
▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved
colored high-voltage cables or parts that are in
roads only.
contact with exposed high-voltage cables.◀
▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, for
instance do not lift the vehicle by the tow WARNING
fitting. Fluids in the high-voltage battery are cor‐
rosive. There is a risk of injury. Do not touch
Safety information fluids escaping from the high-voltage battery.◀
NOTE
If the tow fitting is not used as intended, General information
there may be damage to the vehicle or to the After an accident, compliance with the follow‐
tow fitting. There is a risk of damage to prop‐ ing safety precautions is required with regard
erty. Observe the notes on using the tow fit‐ to the high-voltage system:
ting.◀ ▷ Secure the crash site.
▷ Immediately notify rescue forces, police, or
firefighters of the fact that your vehicle is
equipped with a high-voltage system.
▷ Engage selector lever position P, set the
parking brake and switch off operating and
drive-ready state.
▷ Lock the vehicle after exiting.
218
▷ Do not inhale any gases escaping from the

high-voltage battery; if needed, maintain a
safe distance from the vehicle.
219
Mobility Care
Care
Vehicle features and options The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
that work on the charging connection, e.g.,
This chapter describes all standard, country- cleaning, be performed only by an authorized
specific and optional features offered with the BMW i dealer's service center or another quali‐
series. It also describes features that are not fied service center or repair shop.◀
to the selected options or country versions. NOTE
This also applies to safety-related functions When cleaning with high-pressure wash‐
and systems. When using these functions and ers, components can be damaged due to the
systems, the applicable laws and regulations pressure or temperatures being too high.
must be observed. There is a risk of property damage. Maintain
sufficient distance and do not spray too long
continuously. Follow the operating instructions
Vehicle washes for the high-pressure washer.◀
General information Distances and temperature

Regularly remove foreign objects such as ▷ Maximum temperature: 140 ℉/60 ℃.
leaves in the area below the windshield when
the hood is raised. ▷ Minimum distance from sensors, cameras,
seals: 12 inches/30 cm.
Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in
winter. Intense soiling and road salt can dam‐ ▷ Minimum distance from the charging
age the vehicle. socket flap: 31.5 in/80 cm.
Steam blaster and high-pressure Automatic vehicle washes

washer
Safety information
Safety information NOTE
NOTE Water can penetrate in the windshield
When washing, water can get into the area due to high-pressure washers. There is a
open charging socket. There is a risk of prop‐ risk of property damage. Avoid high-pressure
erty damage. Close the charging socket flap washers.◀
while washing.◀ NOTE
WARNING Improper use of automatic vehicle
Contact with live components can lead to washes can cause damage to the vehicle.
an electric shock. High voltage is applied at the There is a risk of damage to property. Follow
charging connection. There is a risk of injury or the following instructions:
danger to life. ▷ Give preference to cloth vehicle washes or
those that use soft brushes in order to
avoid paint damage.
220
Care Mobility
▷ Avoid vehicle washes with guide rails Soak areas that have been dirtied, for instance
higher than 4 in/10 cm to avoid damage to from insects, with shampoo and wash off with
the chassis. water.
▷ Observe the tire width of the guide rail to Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an ice
avoid damage to tires and rims. scraper.
▷ Fold in exterior mirrors to avoid damage to
the exterior mirrors. After washing the vehicle
▷ Unscrew the rod antenna to avoid the rod After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes
antenna breaking off. briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action
can be reduced. The heat generated during
▷ Deactivate the wiper and, if necessary, rain
braking dries brake discs and brake pads and
sensor to avoid damage to the wiper sys‐
protects them against corrosion.
tem.◀
Completely remove all residues on the win‐
Before driving into a vehicle wash dows, to minimize loss of visibility due to
smearing and to reduce wiper noises and
In order to ensure that the vehicle can roll in a
wiper blade wear.
vehicle wash, take the following steps:
1. Drive into the vehicle wash.

2. Engage selector lever position N. Vehicle care
3. Remove foot from brake pedal.
Vehicle care products
In this way, standby state remains General information
switched on, and a Check Control mes‐ The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
sage is displayed. using care and cleaning products for BMW i.
Suitable care products are available from a
Driving out of a vehicle wash dealer’s service center or another qualified
To switch on drive-ready state: service center or repair shop.
1. Ensure that the vehicle key is in the car.

Safety information
2. Depress the brake pedal.
WARNING
Cleansers can contain substances that
Pressing the Start/Stop button without step‐ are dangerous and harmful to your health.
ping on the brake turns standby state off. There is a risk of injury. When cleaning the in‐
terior, open the doors or windows. Only use
Selector lever position products intended for cleaning vehicles. Fol‐
Selector lever position P is engaged automati‐ low the instructions on the container.◀
cally:
▷ With standby state switched off. Vehicle paint
▷ After approx. 15 minutes.
General information
Headlights Regular care contributes to driving safety and
Do not rub wet headlights dry and do not use value retention. Environmental influences in
abrasive or acidic cleaning agents. areas with elevated air pollution or natural con‐
221
Mobility Care
taminants, such as tree resin or pollen can af‐ Safety information

fect the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the fre‐
NOTE
quency and extent of your vehicle care to
these influences. Open Velcro® fasteners on articles of
clothing can damage the seat covers. There is
Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel, oil,
a risk of property damage. Ensure that any Vel‐
grease or bird droppings, must be removed im‐
cro® fasteners are closed.◀
mediately to prevent the finish from being al‐
tered or discolored.
Caring for special components
Matte finish
Light-alloy wheels
Only use cleaning and care products suitable
for vehicles with matte finish. When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral
wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9.
Leather care Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam
jets above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the manufac‐
Remove dust from the leather regularly, using
turer's instructions.
a cloth or vacuum cleaner.
Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents
Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime
can destroy the protective layer of adjacent
chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased
components, such as the brake disc.
wear and premature degradation of the leather
surface. After cleaning, apply the brakes briefly to dry
them. The heat generated during braking dries
To guard against discoloration, such as from
brake discs and brake pads and protects them
clothing, clean leather and provide leather care
against corrosion.
roughly every two months.
Clean light-colored leather more frequently be‐ Chrome surfaces
cause soiling on such surfaces is substantially
Carefully clean components such as the radia‐
more visible.
tor grille or door handles with an ample supply
Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and of water, possibly with shampoo added, partic‐
grease will gradually break down the protective ularly when they have been exposed to road
layer of the leather surface. salt.
Upholstery material care Rubber components

Environmental influences can cause surface
General information soiling of rubber parts and a loss of gloss. Use
Vacuum the upholstery regularly with a vac‐ only water and suitable cleaning agents for
uum cleaner. cleaning.
If upholstery is very dirty, for instance with bev‐ Treat especially worn rubber parts with rubber
erage stains, use a soft sponge or microfiber care agents at regular intervals. When cleaning
cloth with a suitable cleaning agent. rubber seals, do not use any silicon-containing
Clean the upholstery down to the seams using vehicle care products in order to avoid damage
large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the or noises.
material vigorously.
222
Care Mobility
Fine wood parts Do not allow the switchs to retract the safety
Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐ belts until they are dry.
nents only with a suitable care product.
Carpets and floor mats
Kenaf WARNING
Only treat parts made of Kenaf fibers, e.g., in Objects in the driver's floor area can limit
the door trims, using suitable care products. the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal.
There is a risk of an accident. Stow objects in
Plastic components the vehicle such that they are secured and
NOTE cannot enter into the driver's floor area. Use
floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and
Cleansers that contain alcohol or sol‐
can be safely attached to the floor. Do not use
vents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty
loose floor mats and do not layer several floor
grease removers, fuel, or such, can damage
mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clear‐
plastic parts. There is a risk of property dam‐
ance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats
age. Clean with a microfiber cloth. Dampen
are securely fastened again after they were re‐
cloth lightly with water.◀
moved, for instance for cleaning.◀
Plastic components are e.g.:
Floor mats can be removed from the car's inte‐
▷ Imitation leather surfaces. rior for cleaning.
▷ Roofliner. If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a
▷ Lamp lenses. microfiber cloth and water or an upholstery
▷ Instrument cluster cover. cleaner. To prevent matting of the carpet, rub
back and forth in the direction of travel only.
▷ Matt black spray-coated components.
▷ Painted parts in the interior. Sensor/camera lenses
▷ Carbon parts in the interior. To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a
Clean with a microfiber cloth. cloth moistened with a small amount of glass
detergent.
Dampen cloth lightly with water.
Do not soak the roofliner. Displays/screens
Safety belts NOTE

Chemical cleansers, moisture or fluids of
WARNING
any kind can damage the surface of displays
Chemical cleansers can destroy the and screens. There is a risk of property dam‐
safety belt webbing. Missing protective effect age. Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber
of the safety belts. There is a risk of injuries or cloth.◀
danger to life. Use only a mild soapy solution
for cleaning the safety belts.◀ NOTE
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and The surface of displays can be damaged
thus have a negative impact on safety. with improper cleaning. There is a risk of prop‐
erty damage. Avoid pressure that is too high
Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety
and do not use any scratching materials.◀
belts clipped into their buckles.
Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.
223
Mobility Care
Long idle times and long-term vehicle

storage
Concept
For idle phases that last several weeks, park
the vehicle with a fully charged battery if possi‐
ble.
Do not park the vehicle for longer than 14 days
if the electric range is less than 6 mls, approx.
10 km.
With storage times of up to three months, if
possible plug the vehicle into a compatible
power source or park it in a nearly fully charged
state.
General information
Your dealer's service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop can advise
you on what to consider when storing the vehi‐
cle for longer than three months.
Follow the instructions for discharging the
high-voltage battery, refer to page 163.
Safety information
NOTE
The high-voltage battery can be dam‐
aged by excessive discharge. There is a risk of
property damage. Before storing the vehicle
for an extended period, ensure that the high-
voltage battery is fully charged. During the idle
period, connect the vehicle to a charging sta‐
tion at a compatible charging location. If nec‐
essary, the high-voltage battery will be
charged automatically. Make sure that the
charging process takes place. Regularly check
the charge state.
Do not allow the vehicle to sit idle for longer
than four weeks with a charge state below ap‐
prox. 80 %.◀
224
Care Mobility
225
Reference
This chapter contains the technical data and an
index that will quickly take you to the information
you need.

Reference Technical data
Technical data
General information
The technical data and specifications in this cle or can be obtained from a dealer’s service
Owner's Manual are used as guidance values. center or another qualified service center or re‐
The vehicle-specific data can deviate from this, pair shop.
e.g., due to the selected special equipment, The information in the vehicle documents al‐
country version or country-specific measure‐ ways has priority over the information in this
ment method. Detailed values can be found in Owner's Manual.
the approval documents, on labels on the vehi‐
Dimensions
The dimensions can vary depending on the or spoiler. The heights can deviate, e.g., due to
model version, equipment or country-specific the selected special equipment, tires, load and
measurement method. chassis version.
The specified heights do not take into account
attached parts, e.g., a roof antenna, roof racks
BMW i3
Width with mirrors Inches/mm 80.3/2,039
Width without mirrors Inches/mm 69.9/1,775
Height Inches/mm 62.1/1,578
Length Inches/mm 157.8/4,008
Wheelbase Inches/mm 101.2/2,570
Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 32.4/9.9
228
Technical data Reference
Weights
BMW i3 (60 Ah)
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 3,790/1,719
Load lbs/kg 860/390
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 1,720/780
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,205/1,000
BMW i3 (94 Ah)
Load lbs/kg 838/380
BMW i3 (94 Ah with Range Extender)
Load lbs/kg 666/302
Capacities
US gal/liters Notes
Fuel tank, approx. 2.2/8.7 With optional Range Ex‐

tender
Fuel quality, refer to
page 186
229
Reference Appendix
Appendix
Any updates to the Owner's Manual of the ve‐
hicle are listed here.
230
Appendix Reference
231
Reference Everything from A to Z
Everything from A to Z
Index
A Alarm system 49 AUTO program, automatic cli‐
Alarm, unintentional 51 mate control 141
ABS, Antilock Brake Sys‐ All-season tires, see Winter AUTO program, intensity 141
tem 116 tires 191 Auto washing 220
ACC, Active Cruise Control Ambient light 100 AUX-IN port, general informa‐
with Stop&Go function 119 Antifreeze, washer fluid 79 tion 151
Accelerator pedal posi‐ Antilock Brake System, Average fuel consumption 93
tions 71 ABS 116 Average speed 94
Accessories and parts 8 Anti-slip control, see Axle loads, weights 229
Acoustic pedestrian protec‐ DSC 116
tion 72 App, BMW iDriver’s Guide 6 B
AC quick charging cable, see Approach control warning
Level 2 charging cable 176 with City light braking func‐ Back doors 43
Activated-charcoal filter 143 tion 110 Backrest, seats 55
Active Cruise Control with Approved axle load 229 Band-aids, see First-aid
Stop&Go function, Artificial engine noise 72 kit 216
ACC 119 Ashtray 150 Battery, 12 volt 213
Adaptive brake lights, see Assistance, Roadside Assis‐ Battery replacement, vehicle
Brake force display 115 tance 216 battery 213
Adjustments, steering Assistance when driving Battery replacement, vehicle
wheel 62 off 118 remote control 40
Advance climate control, see AUTO intensity 141 Battery state indicator 83
Stationary climate con‐ Automatic climate con‐ Battery, vehicle 213
trol 143 trol 140 Being towed, see Tow‐
After washing vehicle 221 Automatic cornering adjust‐ ing 216
Airbags 101 ment 60 Belts, safety belts 57
Airbags, indicator/warning Automatic cruise control with BMW Assist 6
light 102 Stop&Go function 119 BMW eDRIVE 31
Air circulation, see Recircu‐ Automatic Curb Monitor 61 BMW Homepage 6
lated-air mode 138, 142 Automatic deactivation, BMW iDriver’s Guide app 6
Air conditioner 137 Front-seat passenger air‐ BMW Internet page 6
Air conditioning 138, 141 bags 103 BMW maintenance sys‐
Air, dehumidifying, see Air Automatic deactivation of the tem 207
conditioning 138, 141 high-voltage system 34 Body work, see Working on
Air distribution, Automatic headlight con‐ the vehicle 34
manual 139, 142 trol 98 Brake assistant 116
Air flow, air conditioner 139 Automatic locking 49 Brake discs, break-in 162
Air flow, automatic climate Automatic recirculated-air Brake force display 115
control 142 control 142 Brake lights, brake force dis‐
Air pressure, tires 187 Automatic vehicle wash 220 play 115
Air vents, see Ventilation 143 Brake pads, break-in 162
232
Everything from A to Z Reference
Braking, information 164 Catalytic converter, see Hot Child restraint systems,
Breakdown assis‐ exhaust system 163 mounting 64
tance 215, 216 CBS Condition Based Serv‐ Child seat, mounting 64
Break-in 162 ice 207 Child seats 63
Brightness of Control Dis‐ Center armrest 157 Chrome parts, care 222
play 96 Center console 16 Cigarette lighter 150
Bulb replacement 209 Central Information Display Cleaning, displays 223
Bulb replacement, front 211 (CID), see Control Dis‐ Climate control 137, 140
Bulb replacement, tail play 18 Clothes hooks 158
lamps 213 Central locking system 42 Coasting 72
Bulbs and lights 209 Central screen, see Control Combination switch, see Turn
Button, RES 122 Display 18 signals 75
Button, Start/Stop 67 Changes, technical, see For Combination switch, see
Bypassing, see Jump-start‐ Your Own Safety 8 Wiper system 76
ing 216 Changing wheels 196 Comfort Access 43
Changing wheels/tires 191 COMFORT program, driving
C Charging battery, see Vehicle dynamics 118
charging 174 Compartments in the
California Proposition 65 Charging cable storage 177 doors 158
Warning 8 Charging cable, unlocking Compass 148
Camera-based assistance manually 178 Compressor 192
systems, see Intelligent Charging screen 82 Computer, see Onboard
Safety 109 Charging, see Charging the Computer 93
Camera-based cruise con‐ vehicle 174 Condensation on win‐
trol 119 Charging, see Vehicle charg‐ dows 139, 143
Camera lenses, care 223 ing 174 Condensation under the vehi‐
Camera, rearview cam‐ Charging socket flap, unlock‐ cle 165
era 131 ing manually 178 Condition Based Service
Care, displays 223 Charging state indicator, CBS 207
Care, vehicle 221 high-voltage battery 83 Confirmation signal 49
Care, washing the vehi‐ Charging status, see display ConnectedDrive 6
cle 220 of the charging status 179 ConnectedDrive Services 6
Cargo 166 Charging the vehicle 174 Contact with water, high-volt‐
Cargo area 152 Charging the vehicle, see Ve‐ age system 34
Cargo area, enlarging 153 hicle charging 174 Container for washer fluid 79
Cargo area, loading 167 Chassis number, see Vehicle Control Display 18
Cargo area, storage compart‐ identification number 10 Control Display, settings 95
ments 159 Check Control 84 Controller 19
Cargo cover 152 Check engine oil 203 Control systems, driving sta‐
Cargo position, rear seat Check oil level 203 bility 116
backrest 153 Children, seating position 63 Convenient opening with the
Cargo, stowing and secur‐ Children, transporting remote control 39
ing 167 safely 63 Coolant 205
Cargo straps 167 Child restraint fixing system Coolant temperature 88
Carpet, care 223 LATCH 65 Cooling, maximum 141
Child restraint system 63 Cooling system 205
233
Corrosion on brake discs 165 Displays, high-voltage sys‐ E

Cosmetic mirror 150 tem 82
Courtesy lights during un‐ Disposal, coolant 206 ECO PRO 169
locking 39 Disposal, vehicle battery 214 ECO PRO+ 169
Courtesy lights with the vehi‐ Distance control, see ECO PRO display 169
cle locked 39 PDC 127 ECO PRO driving mode 169
Cruise control 125 Divided screen view, split ECO PRO driving style analy‐
Cruise control, active with screen 23 sis 171
Stop&Go function 119 Door key, see Remote con‐ ECO PRO mode 169
Cruise control with distance trol 41 ECO PRO Tip - driving in‐
control, see camera-based Drive display 83 struction 170
cruise control, ACC 119 Drive-off assistant 118 eDRIVE drive system, driving
Cruise control without dis‐ Drive-off assistant, see instructions 162
tance control, see cruise DSC 116 eDRIVE, electric driving, see
control 125 Driver assistance, see Intelli‐ BMW eDRIVE 32
Cruising range 89 gent Safety 109 eDrive system, at a glance 31
Current fuel consumption 94 Drive-ready state in detail 68 eDRIVE system, displays 82
Drive-ready state, switching Efficiency display, ECO
D off 71 PRO 170
Drive-ready state, switching EfficientDynamics info 171
Damage, tires 190 on 68 Electric driving 71
Data, technical 228 Driving Dynamics Con‐ Electric driving, see BMW
Date 95 trol 117 eDRIVE 32
Daytime running lights 99 Driving in detail 71 Electric range 89
Defrosting, see Windows, de‐ Driving instructions, break- Electronic Stability Program
frosting 139, 143 in 162 ESP, see DSC 116
Dehumidifying, air 138, 141 Driving instructions, eDRIVE Emergency release, fuel filler
Deleting personal data 24 drive system 162 flap 185
Deletion of personal data 24 Driving mode 117 Emergency Request 215
Departure times, stationary Driving notes, general 163 Emergency service, see
climate control 144 Driving on racetracks 165 Roadside Assistance 216
Digital clock 89 Driving, refer to drive-ready Emergency unlocking, charg‐
Digital compass 148 state in detail 68 ing cable 178
Dimensions 228 Driving stability control sys‐ Emergency unlocking, charg‐
Dimmable exterior mirrors 61 tems 116 ing socket flap 178
Dimmable interior mirror 62 Driving, Start/Stop button 67 Emergency unlocking, trans‐
Direction indicator, see Turn Driving style analysis 171 mission lock 70
signals 75 Driving tips 163 Energy Control 94
Display for performance and DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐ Energy recovery, display‐
energy recovery 83 trol 116 ing 83
Display lighting, see Instru‐ DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐ Energy recovery, driving sta‐
ment lighting 99 trol 117 bility control systems 116
Displays 81 Dynamic Stability Control Engine coolant 205
Displays, care 223 DSC 116 Engine noise, artificial 72
Displays, eDRIVE system 82 Dynamic Traction Control Engine oil 203
DTC 117 Engine oil, adding 204
234
Engine start, jump-start‐ Flooding 164 Glass sunroof, electric 52

ing 216 Floor carpet, care 223 Glass sunroof, initialize the
Entering a vehicle wash 220 Floor mats, care 223 system 54
Equipment, interior 146 Fold-away position, wiper 78 Glove compartment 156
Error displays, see Check Fold back rear seat back‐ GPS geolocation, vehicle po‐
Control 84 rests 153 sition 96
ESP Electronic Stability Pro‐ Foot brake 164 Gross vehicle weight, ap‐
gram, see DSC 116 For Your Own Safety 8 proved 229
Exchanging wheels/tires 191 Front airbags 101
Exhaust system 163 Front armrest 157 H
Exiting a vehicle wash 220 Front beverage holder, front
Expanding range with Range cup holder 157 Halogen headlights, bulb re‐
Extender 72 Front bottle holder, refer to placement 211
Exterior mirror, automatic Front cup holder 157 Handbrake, see parking
dimming feature 61 Front can holder, refer to brake 73
Exterior mirrors 60 Front cup holder 157 Hand-held transmitter, alter‐
Exterior mirrors, malfunc‐ Front cup holder 157 nating code 147
tion 60 Front holder for bever‐ Hazard warning flashers 215
External start 216 ages 157 Head airbags 101
External temperature dis‐ Front lights 211 Headlamp courtesy delay fea‐
play 89 Front-seat passenger airbags, ture 98
External temperature warn‐ automatic deactivation 103 Headlamps 211
ing 89 Front-seat passenger airbags, Headlight control, auto‐
Eyes for securing cargo 167 indicator lamp 104 matic 98
Front seats 55 Headlight courtesy delay fea‐
F FTM Flat Tire Monitor 107 ture, remote control 49
Fuel 186 Headlight flasher 76
Failure message, see Check Fuel cap 184 Headlight glass 210
Control 84 Fuel consumption, see Aver‐ Headlights, care 221
False alarm, see Unintentional age fuel consumption 93 Head restraints, front 58
alarm 51 Fuel filler flap 184 Head restraints, rear 59
Fan, see Air flow 139, 142 Fuel gauge, Range Ex‐ Heavy cargo, stowing
Fine wood, care 223 tender 88 cargo 167
First-aid kit 216 Fuel quality 186 Height, vehicle 228
Flat tire, changing Fuel recommendation 186 High beams 76
wheels 196 Fuel, tank capacity 229 High beams, bulb replace‐
Flat tire message, FTM 108 Fuse 214 ment 212
Flat tire message, TPM 106 High-voltage battery, charg‐
Flat Tire Monitor FTM 107 G ing state indicator 83
Flat tire, repairing 192 High-voltage battery, dis‐
Flat tire, Tire Pressure Moni‐ Garage door opener, see Uni‐ charge 163
tor TPM 104 versal Integrated Remote High-voltage battery,
Flat tire warning light, Control 146 heated 73
FTM 108 Gasoline 186 High-voltage battery, heavily
Flat tire warning light, General driving notes 163 discharged 73
TPM 106 Glare shield 150
235
High-voltage system, auto‐ Info Display, see Onboard Jam protection system, glass
matic deactivation 34 Computer 93 sunroof 53
High-voltage system, contact Information 6 Jump-starting 216
with water 34 Initialize, Tire Pressure Moni‐
High-voltage system, dis‐ tor TPM 105 K
plays 82 Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor
High-voltage system, FTM 108 Kenaf, care 223
safety 34 Instrument cluster 81 Key/remote control 41
Hills 165 Instrument lighting 99 Keyless Go, see Comfort Ac‐
Hill start assistant, see Drive- Integrated key 41 cess 43
off assistant 118 Integrated Owner's Manual in Key Memory, see Personal
Hold function 75 the vehicle 29 Profile 46
Homepage 6 Intelligent emergency Key, see Remote control 38
Hood 45 call 215 Knee airbag 102
Horn 14 Intelligent Safety 109
Hot exhaust system 163 Intended use 8 L
Hydroplaning 164 Intensity, AUTO pro‐
gram 141 Label on recommended
I Interior equipment 146 tires 191
Interior lights 99 Lamp replacement, front 211
Ice warning, see External Interior lights during unlock‐ Language on Control Dis‐
temperature warning 89 ing 39 play 96
Icy roads, see External tem‐ Interior lights with the vehicle Lashing eyes 167
perature warning 89 locked 39 LATCH child restraint fixing
Identification marks, tires 188 Interior mirror 60 system 65
Identification number, see Ve‐ Interior mirror, automatic dim‐ Leather, care 222
hicle identification num‐ ming feature 62 LED headlights, bulb replace‐
ber 10 Interior mirror, compass 148 ment 212
iDrive 18 Interior mirror, manually dim‐ LEDs, light-emitting di‐
Ignition key, see Remote con‐ mable 61 odes 210
trol 41 Interior motion sensor 50 Length, vehicle 228
Illuminant replacement 209 Internet page 6 Letters and numbers, enter‐
Important under the Interval display, service re‐ ing 24
hood 201 quirements 90 Level 1 Charging 181
Increasing the range 168 Interval mode 77 Level 1 charging cable 176
Indicator/warning lights, see In the vicinity of the center Level 2 Charging 181
Check Control 84 console 16 Level 2 charging cable 176
Indicator light, see Check In the vicinity of the roof‐ Light 97
Control 84 liner 17 Light-alloy wheels, care 222
Individual air distribu‐ In the vicinity of the steering Light-emitting diodes,
tion 139, 142 wheel 14 LEDs 210
Individual settings, see Per‐ Lighting 97
sonal Profile 46 J Light replacement, see Bulb
Inflation pressure, tires 187 replacement 209
Inflation pressure warning Jacking points for the vehicle Light switch 97
FTM, tires 107 jack 198 Load 167
236
Loading 166 Menus, operating, iDrive 18 Oil change interval, service

Loading position 153 Menus, see iDrive operating requirements 90
Location, vehicle position 96 concept 19 Old batteries, disposal 214
Locking, automatic 49 Messages, see Check Con‐ Onboard Computer 93
Locking, settings 48 trol 84 Onboard Computer, Control
Longer idle phases 224 Microfilter 139, 143 Display 94
Long idle times and long-term Minimum tread, tires 190 Opening and closing 38
vehicle storage 224 Mirror 60 Operating concept, iDrive 18
Long-term vehicle stor‐ Mobile communication devi‐ Optional equipment 7
age 224 ces in the vehicle 164 Outside air, see Automatic re‐
Low beams 97 Mobility System 192 circulated-air control 142
Modifications, technical, see Overheating of engine, see
M For Your Own Safety 8 Coolant temperature 88
Moisture in headlight 210
Maintaining charging state, Monitor, see Control Dis‐ P
refer to Range Extender 72 play 18
Maintenance 207 Mounting of child restraint Paint, vehicle 221
Maintenance require‐ systems 64 Panic alarm, see Panic
ments 207 Multifunction steering wheel, mode 50
Maintenance, service require‐ buttons 14 Panic mode 50
ments 90 Multimedia 6 Parallel parking assistant 133
Maintenance system, Park Distance Control
BMW 207 N PDC 127
Make-up mirror 150 Parked vehicle, condensa‐
Malfunction displays, see Navigation 6 tion 165
Check Control 84 Neck restraints, front, see Parked vehicle ventilation,
Manual air distribu‐ Head restraints 58 see Stationary climate con‐
tion 139, 142 Neck restraints, rear, see trol 143
Manual air flow 139, 142 Head restraints 59 Parking aid, see PDC 127
Manual operation, fuel filler Neutral cleaner, see Wheel Parking assistant 133
flap 185 cleaner 222 Parking brake 73
Manual operation, PDC Park New wheels and tires 191 Parking lights 97
Distance Control 128 Parts and accessories 8
Manual operation, rearview O Passenger's side mirror, tilt‐
camera 131 ing downward 61
Master key, see Remote con‐ OBD Onboard Diagnosis 208 Pathway lines, rearview cam‐
trol 41 OBD, see OBD Onboard Di‐ era 131
Matte finish 222 agnosis 208 PDC Park Distance Con‐
Maximum cooling 141 Obstacle marking, rearview trol 127
Maximum speed, display 91 camera 132 Pedestrian protection 72
Maximum speed, winter Octane rating, see Recom‐ Pedestrian warning with Ap‐
tires 192 mended fuel grade 186 proach control 112
Measurement, units of 96 Odometer 89 Performance display 83
Medical kit 216 Office 6 Personal Profile 46
Menu in instrument clus‐ Oil 203 Personal Profile, exporting
ter 92 Oil, adding 204 profiles 48
237
Pinch protection system, win‐ Ratchet straps 167 Rolling code hand-held trans‐
dows 52 Rear beverage holder, rear mitter 147
Plastic, care 223 cup holder 158 RON recommended fuel
PostCrash 115 Rear bottle holder, refer to grade 186
Power failure 214 Rear cup holder 158 Roofliner 17
Power sunroof, glass 52 Rear can holder, refer to Rear Rubber components,
Power windows 51 Cup holder 158 care 222
Pressure, tire air pres‐ Rear cup holder 158
sure 187 Rear doors 43 S
Pressure warning FTM, Rear holder for bever‐
tires 107 ages 158 Safe braking 164
Profile, see Personal Pro‐ Rearview camera 130 Safety belt reminder for driv‐
file 46 Rear window de‐ er's seat and front passen‐
Programmable memory but‐ froster 139, 143 ger seat 58
tons, iDrive 23 Recirculated-air filter 143 Safety belts 57
Protective function, glass Recirculated-air Safety belts, care 223
sunroof 53 mode 138, 142 Safety belts, see Safety
Protective function, win‐ Recommended fuel belts 57
dows 52 grade 186 Safety of the high-voltage
Push-and-turn reel, see Con‐ Recommended tire system 34
troller 19 brands 191 Safety systems, airbags 101
Remaining range 89 Screen, see Control Dis‐
Q Remote control/key 41 play 18
Remote control, additional 40 Sealant 192
Quick charging cable, see Remote control, loss 40 Seat heating, front 57
Level 2 charging cable 176 Remote control, malfunc‐ Seating position for chil‐
Quick charging, see Level 2 tion 40 dren 63
Charging 181 Remote control, opening/ Seats, front 55
closing 38 Secondary lights, rear 213
R Remote control, univer‐ Securing cargo 167
sal 146 Selection list in instrument
Racetrack operation 165 Replacing wheels/tires 191 cluster 92
Radiator fluid 205 Reporting safety malfunc‐ Sensors, care 223
Radio 6 tions 10 Service and warranty 9
Radio-operated key, see Re‐ RES button 122 Service requirements, Condi‐
mote control 41 RES button, see Camera- tion Based Service
Radio-operated remote con‐ based cruise control, CBS 207
trol, opening/closing 38 ACC 119 Service requirements, dis‐
Rain sensor 77 RES button, see Cruise con‐ play 90
Range Extender, expanding trol 125 Service, Roadside Assis‐
range 72 Reserve warning, see tance 216
Range Extender, Fuel Range 89 Services, ConnectedDrive 6
gauge 88 Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor SET button, see Camera-
Range Extender, mainte‐ TPM 105 based cruise control,
nance run 72 Retreaded tires 191 ACC 119
Range Extender, use 72 Roadside parking lights 97
238
SET button, see Cruise con‐ Storage compartments, loca‐ Tire damage 190
trol 125 tions 156 Tire identification marks 188
Settings, locking/unlock‐ Storage, tires 192 Tire inflation pressure 187
ing 48 Storing the charging cable, Tire inflation pressure moni‐
Settings on Control Dis‐ see Storage 177 tor, see FTM 107
play 95 Storing the vehicle 224 Tire Pressure Monitor
Side airbags 101 Stowing and securing TPM 104
Signaling, horn 14 cargo 167 Tire repair kit, see Mobility
Signals when unlocking 49 Summer tires, tread 190 System 192
Sitting safely 55 Sun visor 150 Tires, changing 191
Size 228 Supplementary SMS text Tire sealant, see Mobility
Slide/tilt glass roof 52 message 88 System 192
Smallest turning radius 228 Switch for driving dynam‐ Tires, everything on wheels
SMS text message, supple‐ ics 117 and tires 187
mentary 88 Switching off, drive-ready Tire tread 190
Snow chains 196 state 71 Tone 6
Socket 150 Switching on, drive-ready Total vehicle weight 229
Socket, OBD Onboard Diag‐ state 68 Touchpad 21
nostics 208 Switch, see Cockpit 14 Towing 216
SOS button 215 Symbols 6 TPM Tire Pressure Moni‐
Speed, average 94 Symbols in the status field 22 tor 104
Speed Limit Info 91 Traction control 117
Speed Limit Info, Onboard T TRACTION, driving dynam‐
Computer 94 ics 117
Speed limits, display 91 Tailgate opening 46 Transmission lock, electronic
Speed warning 94 Tailgate via remote con‐ unlocking 70
Split screen 23 trol 39 Transporting children
Stability control systems 116 Tail lamps, bulb replace‐ safely 63
Standard charging cable, see ment 213 Tread, tires 190
Level 1 charging cable 176 Tank unlocking, see Tank Trip computer 94
Standard charging, see Level vent 184 Triple turn signal activa‐
1 Charging 181 Tank vent 184 tion 75
Standard equipment 7 Technical changes, see For Trip odometer 89
Standby state 68 Your Own Safety 8 Trip recorder, see Trip odom‐
Start/Stop button 67 Technical data 228 eter 89
Stationary climate con‐ Telephone 6 Turning radius 228
trol 143 Temperature, air condi‐ Turning radius lines, rearview
Stationary climate control, re‐ tioner 138 camera 132
mote control 49 Temperature, automatic cli‐ Turn signal, bulb replace‐
Status control display, mate control 140 ment 212
tires 105 Temperature display for ex‐ Turn signals, operation 75
Status information, iDrive 22 ternal temperature 89
Status of Owner's Manual 7 Theft alarm system, see U
Steering wheel, adjusting 62 Alarm system 49
Storage compartments 156 Tilt alarm sensor 50 Unintentional alarm 51
Time 95 Units of measurement 96
239
Universal remote control 146 Warning triangle 216 Word match concept 25
Unlocking, settings 48 Warranty 8 Working on the body, see
Updates made after the edito‐ Washer fluid 79 Working on the vehicle 34
rial deadline 7 Washer nozzles, wind‐ Working on the high-voltage
Upholstery care 222 shield 78 system, see Working on the
USB interface, general infor‐ Washer system 76 vehicle 34
mation 151 Washing the vehicle 220 Working under the hood 201
USB port, see USB inter‐ Water, high-voltage sys‐
face 151 tem 34
Use, intended 8 Water on roads 164
Using Range Extender 72 Weights 229
Welcome lights 98
V Welcome lights during un‐
locking 39
Vanity mirror 150 What to do after an acci‐
Vehicle battery 213 dent 218
Vehicle battery, replac‐ Wheelbase, vehicle 228
ing 213 Wheel cleaner 222
Vehicle, break-in 162 Wheels, changing 191
Vehicle care 221 Wheels, everything on wheels
Vehicle care products 221 and tires 187
Vehicle features and op‐ Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor
tions 7 FTM 107
Vehicle identification num‐ Wheels, Tire Pressure Moni‐
ber 10 tor TPM 104
Vehicle jack 198 Width, vehicle 228
Vehicle key, see Remote con‐ Window defroster,
trol 41 rear 139, 143
Vehicle paint 221 Windows, powered 51
Vehicle position, vehicle loca‐ Windshield washer fluid 79
tion 96 Windshield washer noz‐
Vehicle wash 220 zles 78
Vehicle, washing 220 Windshield washer sys‐
Ventilation 143 tem 76
Venting, see Stationary cli‐ Windshield wiper, see Wiper
mate control 143 system 76
VIN, see Vehicle identification Winter storage, care 224
number 10 Winter tires, suitable
Voice activation system 26 tires 191
Winter tires, tread 190
W Wiper 76
Wiper blades, replacing 209
Warning displays, see Check Wiper fluid 79
Control 84 Wiper, fold-away position 78
Warning messages, see Wiper system 76
Check Control 84 Wood, care 223
240
BMW i
The Ultimate
Driving Machine®
01402978839 ue
*BL2978839008*

2017 BMW I3 30

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2017 BMW I3 30

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Contents BMW i

A-Z The Ultimate

THE BMW i3.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402978839 - II/17

The Owner's Manual is available in many countries as an app.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402978839 - II/17

Online Edition for Part no. 01402978839 - II/17

Online Edition for Part no. 01402978839 - II/17

Updates made after the editorial

cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the Maintenance

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect

For Canadian customers

Online Edition for Part no. 01402978839 - II/17

In the vicinity of the steering wheel

1 Power windows 51 Low beams 97

5 Left steering column stalk

Turn signal 75 Rear window wiper 78

High beams, head‐ Clean the rear window 78

Roadside parking lights 97 10 Steering wheel buttons, right

8 Selector lever 69 Telephone

Cruise control: resume speed

Active Cruise Control, adjust dis‐

Cruise control rocker switch

In the vicinity of the center console

1 Control Display 18 6 Controller with buttons 19

In the vicinity of the roofliner

1 Emergency Request, SOS 215 4 Reading lights 99

2 Glass sunroof, electric 52 5 Interior lights 99

3 Indicator light, front-seat passen‐

Concept 1 Control Display

Safety information General information

2. "Turn off control display" 3. Move in four directions.

Controller Buttons on the controller

1. Turn. MEDIA Opens the Multimedia menu.

NAV Opens the Navigation menu.

TEL Opens the Phone menu.

BACK Displays the previous panel.

OPTION Open the Options menu.

The main menu is displayed.

The "Options" menu is displayed.

2. Press the controller.

Menu items in the Owner's Manual

Changing between panels Options menu

3. Press the controller.

Activating/deactivating the functions ▷ To delete a character, swipe to the left on

Using interactive map

Selecting functions Interactive map. Swipe into respective

1. Press button. The main menu is dis‐

3. If necessary, move the Controller to the left ▷ Traffic bulletin reception.

HD Radio station is being received.

Signal strength of cellular network.

Cellular network is not available.

Bluetooth is switched on.

SMS text message received.

Symbol Meaning Selecting the display

SIM card is blocked. 1. Press button.

The sound output has been

1. Switch on standby state.

Deleting personal data in the

Switching between upper/lower case,

Enter the letters.

Enter the numbers.

or Tip the Controller up.